SECTION 12M - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

SYSTEM (VERSION 8.0 & 8.1)

CAUTION:

This vehicle will be equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). A SRS will

consist of either seat belt pre-tensioners and a driver's air bag, seat belt pre-

tensioners and a driver's and front passenger's air bags or seat belt pre-tensioners,

driver’s and front passenger’s air bag and left and right hand side air bags. Refer to

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS in this Section of the Service Information CD before

performing any service operation on, or around any SRS components, the steering

mechanism or wiring. Failure to follow the SAFETY PRECAUTIONS could result in

SRS deployment, resulting in possible personal injury or unnecessary SRS system

repairs.

CAUTION:

This vehicle may be equipped with LPG (Liquefied Petroleum Gas). In the interests of

safety, the LPG fuel system should be isolated by turning 'OFF' the manual service

valve and then draining the L PG service lines, before any service w ork is carried out

on the vehicle. Refer to the LPG leaflet included with the Owner's Handbook for

details or the appropriate Section of this Service Information CD for more specific

servicing information.

1. GENERAL INFORMATION

In August 1998, two new Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) were introduced to VT Series Models; version 8.0

and 8.1.

Version 8.0 supersedes version 6.2 and is used on vehicles with pre-tensioners only (LHD Vehicles only), pre-

tensioners and driver’s air bag only or pre-tensioners and driver’s and front passenger’s air bags (2, 3 and 4 loop

systems). The 8.0 Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) is backward compatible with the 6.2 SDM.

Version 8.1 is used on vehicles with pre-tensioners and driver’s and front passenger’s and side air bags (6 loop

system).

MODEL Pre-tensioner Driver’s

Air bag Passenger

Air bag Side

Air bags

Executive standard standard optional not available

Acclaim standard standard standard optional

S standard standard optional not available

SS standard standard standard not available

Berlina standard standard standard optional

Calais standard standard standard optional

NOTE:

Side air bags are standard equipment on VT Series Calais Anniversary Pack Models.

The majority of components for SRS 8.0 and 8.1 carry over from the earlier version of SRS (6.2) fitted to VT Series

Models. Therefore, for General Information, Service Operations, Diagnostics and Specifications not covered in this

Section, refer to Section 12M SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (VERSION 6.2) in of this Service

Information CD.

Although physically possible, an 8.0 SDM must NOT be fitted to a VT Series Model that was originally fitted with the

earlier type 6.2 SDM, unless the SRS wiring harness fitted to the vehicle has earth circuit 305 incorporated into it.

Techline

Without the additional earth circuit, the SRS functionality may become less reliable and impede the system

operation. (Refer to 1.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS, WIRING HARNESS in this Section for additional information

and relevant break points).

The SRS is intended as a supplement to the protection offered by the driver and front passenger seat belts by

deploying an air bag from the centre of the steering wheel and (when fitted) a passenger’s air bag from the top left

hand side of the instrument panel pad assembly during certain frontal crashes. Seat belt pre-tensioners are also

activated.

On vehicles with SRS 8.1, the addition of side air bags provides further protection for the driver and front passenger

during certain side impact crashes.

Deployment of the air bag/s and seat belt pre-tensioners is automatic, making the SRS a passive restraint. The

driver does not control the operation or activation of the system.

The pre-tensioners and front air bags (driver’s and front passenger’s) operate if the vehicle is involved in certain

frontal (or near frontal) impacts. The frontal impact would normally be within a 60 degree window, occurring up to 30

degrees off the centre line of the vehicle, refer to Fig. 12M-2. The pre-conditions that determine the operation of the

side air bags are much harder to quantify in terms of set speeds or quotable angles of impact.

The SRS control module (SDM) has the ability to command some aspects of the SRS restraint devices

independently of each other; deployment of the seat belt pre-tensioners only, seat belt pre-tensioners and front air

bags, or side air bags. Activation is not designed to occur in situations that would not provide any driver/front

passenger protection benefit.

A side air bag will only deploy on the side on which a side impact collision occurs and is independent of the pre-

tensioners and front air bags.

Side air bag deployment conditions are not readily quantifiable. The side air bags are calibrated to deploy in

accidents where there is risk of serious injury to the (relevant) occupant. However, while the side air bag will deploy

and offer protection in most serious side impact collisions, it will not do so in all collisions. The limited time available

to detect some events means that it is not possible to deploy the side air bag in every situation it would be desirable

to do so. This is particularly true of some pole type collisions.

As a result of the side air bag deployment conditions not being readily quantifiable, the following pre-conditions

determine the operation of the SRS pre-tensioners and front air bags only :

Pre-tensioners and front air bags will deploy independently of the side air bags.

NOTE:

The figures quoted below are the minimum required for the S RS to deploy and are the equivalent of a head

on contact between the vehicle and a barrier or other immovable objec t.

In most accident scenarios, the vehicle speed required to activate the pre-tensioners and front air bags

would be much greater than these values.

Pre-tensioner Front Air Bags

No Deployment 15 km/h* 20 km/h**

Complete

Deployment 20 km/h* 28 km/h**

Inflation/Tension

Time 5 ms 30 ms

Max. Displacement

Free Moving Mass 3.0 cm 12.5 cm

* If the vehicle is travelling below 15 km/h and is involved in a frontal (or near frontal) collision, the seat belt pre-

tensioner will not deploy, between 15 and 20 km/h, the pre-tensioner may or may not deploy, and over 20 km/h,

the pre-tensioners will deploy.

** If the vehicle is travelling below 20 km/h and is involved in a frontal (or near frontal) collision, the air bag/s will

not deploy, between 20 and 28 km/h, the air bag/s may or may not deploy, and over 28 km/h, the air bag/s will

deploy.

The inflation time for a side air bag is approximately 10ms.

Figure 12M-1 SRS System

Figure 12M-2 Angle Of Frontal Impact

For deployment to occur, numerous factors must be taken into account. For instance, the crush area of the other

vehicle (if involved in the crash), its mass and speed would all contribute to raising or lowering the force required for

deployment to occur as designed. As a general rule, for front air bags and pre-tensioners, the angle of impact force

will be within the 60 degree window for SRS deployment to occur (refer Fig. 12M-2), although the physical damage

to the vehicle may appear that it was.

The sensors that control the front air bags and seat belt pre-tensioner deployment are incorporated in the Sensing

and Diagnostic Module (SDM), located beneath the centre console.

There are two sensors (peripheral acceleration sensors) that control the deployment of the side air bags; one in the

left hand B pillar, and the other in the right hand B pillar. If a peripheral acceleration sensor detects a crash

situation, it will send a signal to the SDM requesting a side air bag be deployed. If the SDM is in agreement,

deployment will occur.

Regular maintenance of SRS is not required. If at anytime the SRS warning lamp comes on while driving, or does

not come on when the vehicle is started, there is a system fault and this must be rectified as soon as possible.

The TECH 2 diagnostic scan tool is programmed to assist with VT electrical diagnosis and problem solving,

including SRS.

TECH 2 connects to the SRS serial data communication information via the Data Link Connector (DLC), attached to

the instrument panel lower right hand trim, to the right of the steering column. For additional information on DLC

location and system diagnosis, refer to 3 DIAGNOSIS in this Section. For more specific and comprehensive

information regarding TECH 2, refer to Section 0C TECH 2 in this Service Information CD.

IMPORTANT:

Accessory type or after market bull bars or such devices not approved by Holden's and fitted to a vehicle

with SRS may adversely affect the vehicles desired threshold characteristics for SRS deployment.

Accessory and after market seat covers MUST NOT be fitted to a vehicle with side air bags unless approved

by Holden. Seat covers that are not approved by Holden could grea tly inhibit the performance of the side

air bag and occupants safety in the event of side air bag deployment.

On vehicles with front passenger's air bag, accessory type or after market type dash panel carpet covers,

or the like MUST NOT be installed, as this will greatly inhibit the performance of the air bag and front

passenger's safety in the event of an air bag deployment.

Fitting of accessories such as drink holders, cassette racks additional mirrors, etc. are not permitted in the

immediate deployment area of the front passenger's and side air bags as these may be ripped off and

propelled towards the vehicle's occupants when the air bag is deployed.

Figure 12M-3 illustrates the locations within the passenger compartment of the SRS components.

Figure 12M-3 SRS Components

1. Front passenger’s air bag inflator assembly. 7. Seat belt pre-tensioner assembly.

2. Passenger Air Bag (PAB) door. 8. Left peripheral acceleration sensor.

3. Clock spring coil assembly. 9. Left side air bag.

4. SRS wiring harness (part of body wiring harness). 10. Right peripheral acceleration sensor.

5. Horn bar and driver’s air bag inflator module. 11. Right side air bag.

6. Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM).

The SRS system operates the side air bag inflator modules in four stages to protect the driver or front seat

passenger during a side impact collision, refer to Fig. 12M-4.

NOTE:

A side air bag will deploy independently of the other SRS air bags and pre-tensioners.

1. Before Deployment: The SRS is in a state of readiness, unless the Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)

detects a fault and alerts the vehicle driver via the SRS warning lamp in the instrument cluster warning lamp

panel.

2. Fully Deployed: The relevant side air bag is inflated and the SDM records the data related to the SRS

conditions and operation.

3. During Restraint: The force of the crash causes the head and upper torso of the front passenger or driver to

move sideways into the inflated air bag. Gas is vented from the thorax or chest region of the bag to the head

region, reducing the chest loads and providing support for the head and neck.

4. End of Crash

Figure 12M-4 SRS Side Air Bag Deployment

1.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS

SENSING AND DIAGNOSTIC MODULE (SDM)

The SDM (1), which is mounted under the centre

console assembly, consists of an electronic

acceleration sensor system, electronic control

system, energy storage devices, self diagnostics,

fault memory and crash event recording facility.

The primary function of the SDM, as part of the

SRS, is to sense crash events and discriminate

between non-deployment and required deployment

events.

The SDM is a centralised, self contained crash

sensing and triggering system that, with exception

of two peripheral ac celeration sensor s f or detecting

lateral acceleration for side air bags, requires no

additional external sensing inputs. The SDM also

performs continual tests on the pre-tensioner and

air bag circuits for the front seat belt pre-tensioners,

the driver's air bag and (if fitted) front passenger's

and side air bags.

In the case of a deployment event, the function of

the sensing system is to initiate the pre-tensioners

or pre-tensioners and front air bag/s or relevant

side air bag in a timely manner in order to protect

the vehicle occupant/s. Secondary to this, the SDM

can diagnose system faults which may prevent air

bag deployment or increase the probability of an

inadvertent deployment and warn the driver in the

case of a system fault.

The SDM is designed for a one time deployment

use only, and must be replaced after a

deployment. If deployment occurs and the SDM

is not replaced, the SRS warning lamp in the

instrument cluster will be continually

illuminated.

Figure 12M-5 SDM Location

Integrated in the SDM are two piezoelectric sensors

(crash sensor) that constantly monitor the

acceleration data of the vehicle. Microprocessors

within the SDM run the outputs from these

acceleration sensors (accelerometers) through a

com plex mathematical algorithm . A similar function

is performed by each peripheral acceleration

sensor (where fitted). The respective outputs are

com par ed to a set of stor ed values in the proc es sor

memory. If the processed values exceed their set

of stored values, the SDM provides an AC output

signal to ignite the pyrotechnic gas generators of

the relevant SRS component/s .

An energy reserve (capacitor) in the SDM stores

sufficient energy to activate the air bag/s in the

event of the electrical system being damaged by

the impact.

The electronic diagnostic facility within the SDM

constantly monitors the electrical circuits and the

firing circuit. Faults that occur in the system are

stored in the m em or y and the SRS warning lam p in

the instrument cluster warning lamp panel will be

switched on.

The SDM performs the following functions:

It continuously monitors the SRS electrical circuits.

It controls the SRS warning lamp in the instrument cluster to alert the vehicle driver of a detected system fault.

It has an energy reserve that provides back-up power (in case the vehicle system power is lost during a crash) to

operate the air bag inflator module/s.

NOTE:

Due to the presence of energy storage devices within the SDM, servicing of any SRS component should not be

attempted within 10 seconds after disabling the system.

During deployment, it records and stores SRS and crash event information:

-Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) for detected faults.

-SRS warning lamp operation data.

It communicates diagnostic information through the Data Link Connector (DLC) for the following purposes:

-System checks at the vehicle assembly plant.

-Service diagnosis (using TECH 2).

-Transmitting of crash event recording data for post

crash analysis.

For details on connecting TECH 2 to the DLC, refer to 3.4 TECH 2 DIAGNOSTICS in this Section, or for more

detailed information regarding TECH 2, refer to Section 0C TECH 2, in this Service Information CD.

Additionally, in the event of SRS deployment, the SDM will send serial data via the auxiliary serial data bus (circuit

1220) to advise various vehicle systems to take appropriate shutdown action.

The PCM monitors this serial data and performs a vehicle shutdown once the appropriate data is identified and the

vehicle speed is zero for more than 10 seconds.

The BCM also monitors this serial data and performs the following actions once the appropriate data is identified

and the vehicle speed is zero for more than 10 seconds:

Turn the dome lamp on continuously.

Unlock all doors.

NOTE:

This is only effective for the ignition cycle in which the deployment(s) occurred. Providing the vehicle electric’s are

functional, cycling the ignition will restore normal function.

For VT Series Models with SRS 8.0 and 8.1 systems, four different and non-interchangeable SDMs are released.

These systems can be identified by the last digit of the part number:

2 - 2 loop system for pre-tensioners only (8.0 SDM).

3 - 3 loop system for pre-tensioners and driver's air bag only (8.0 SDM).

4 - 4 loop system for pre-tensioners, driver's air bag and front passenger's air bag (8.0 SDM).

6 - 6 loop system for pre-tensioners, driver’s air bag, front passenger’s air bag and side air bags (8.1 SDM).

NOTE:

Always refer to the latest VT Series spare parts information for the latest part numbers when ordering SRS

components.

SDM TERMINAL ASSIGNMENTS

TERMINAL NO. FUNCTION SYSTEM

1 Left hand pre-tensioner, plus 8.0 & 8.1

2 Left hand pre-tensioner, minus 8.0 & 8.1

3 Right hand pre-tensioner, plus 8.0 & 8.1

4 Right hand pre-tensioner, minus 8.0 & 8.1

5 Battery voltage 8.0 & 8.1

8 Earth 8.0 & 8.1

9 Serial data 8.0 & 8.1

10 Driver’s air bag, plus 8.0 & 8.1

11 Driver’s air bag, minus 8.0 & 8.1

13 Front passenger’s air bag, plus 8.0 & 8.1

14 Front passenger’s air bag, minus 8.0 & 8.1

16 Left hand side air bag, plus 8.1 only

17 Left hand side air bag, minus 8.1 only

18 Right hand side air bag, plus 8.1 only

19 Right hand side air bag, minus 8.1 only

20 Left hand peripheral acceleration sensor,

plus 8.1 only

21 Right hand peripheral acceleration

sensor, plus 8.1 only

33 Left hand peripheral acceleration sensor,

minus 8.1 only

34 Right hand peripheral acceleration

sensor, minus 8.1 only

Figure 12M-6 SDM 8.0 Figure 12M-7 SDM 8.1

Figure 12m-8 Circuit Diagram For Vehicles With An 8.0 SDM (No Side Air Bags)

Figure 12M-9 Circuit Diagram For Vehicles With An 8.1 SDM (Side Air Bags)

SYSTEM OPERATION

With an AC firing system it is possible to fire the air bags and pre-tensioners even if a (single wire) short circuit

exists, this is possible due to the use of a ‘H’ firing circuit.

The ‘H’ bridge circuit is used to allow readiness in the case of single wiring harness faults. The bridge structure

allows several firing paths so that the squib can still be fired even if one of the four power transistors is faulty. The

firing energy is fed from the energy reserve by diode D2 and from the battery by diode D1.

This means that the higher of the two voltages is always present at the power stages. Normally this energy reserve

voltage is 45 volts. If for any reason the reserve voltage is unavailable if a firing is required, it is possible to trigger

from the battery voltage.

NOTE:

The operation of only one firing loop is described in the following explanation. However the operation of all firing

loops is the same.

FIRING MODE 1

S3 is closed connecting the firing loop (-) to ground. S4 is open.

Figure 12M-10 Firing Mode 1 Charging

S1 and S2 are switched alternately for approximately 5µs, thereby causing charging and discharging cycles at the

initiator.

Figure 12M-11 Firing Mode 1 Discharging

Figure 12M-12 Firing Mode 1 Charging Figure 12M-13 Firing Mode 1 Discharging

In this phase of operation a shorted firing loop (-) has no influence on firing, as the firing current flows through the

initiator via S1 and S2. S3 is not damaged due to the current limiting of the power stages even if a short to battery

exists. Firing then takes place into the short circuit to battery voltage.

FIRING MODE 2

S2 is closed and firing loop (+) is therefore connected to ground. S1 is open.

Figure 12M-14 Firing Mode 2 Charging

S4 and S3 are switched alternately for approximately 5µs, thereby causing charging and discharging cycles at the

initiator.

Figure 12M-15 Firing Mode 2 Discharging

Figure 12M-16 Firing Mode 2 Charging Figure 12M-17 Firing Mode 2 Discharging

In this phase of operation a short circuit at the firing loop (+) has no influence since firing current flows through the

initiator via S4 and S3. S2 is not damaged due to current limitation of the power stages, even if a short circuit to

battery voltage exists on the firing loop (+) line. Firing takes place into the short circuit to battery voltage.

Modes 1 and 2 are activated alternately for several cycles respectively. If the voltage at the power stages has

dropped to below 25 volts, phase 3 is started. If the energy reserve is not available for any reason when firing is

required, only battery voltage at the power stage is present, and firing occurs immediately w ith firing mode 3.

FIRING MODE 3

S2 and S4 are switched off, S1 and S3 are switched on. This charges the capacitor to battery voltage.

Figure 12M-18 Firing Mode 3 Charging

S1 and S3 are switched off, S2 and S4 are switched on. This discharges the capacitor and then charges it in the

reverse direction. Due to this recharging of the capacitor via the firing element from positive voltage to negative

voltage, the firing voltage of this mode can be considered to be doubled to 2x VER (Energy Reserve Voltage) or 2x

VBAT (Battery Voltage). As a result AC firing from battery voltage is possible.

Figure 12M-19 Firing Mode 3 Discharging

Figure 12M-20 Firing Mode 3 Charging Positive Figure 12M-21 Firing Mode 3 Charging Negative

FIRING LOOP MONITORING

The firing loop monitoring ensures that failures in the firing leads and squibs that could affect triggering are

identified.

The following errors in the firing loops or squibs are detected.

Short circuit or leakage resistance to ground or battery voltage.

Short circuit or shunt circuit between firing leads of the firing loop.

Resistance of the squib too high or too low.

Capacitance of the firing loop capacitor too high or too low.

In the case of AC firing, measurement of the squib resistance is more difficult because no direct measurement of

this resistance is possible due to the in series capacitor. The dynamic measurement described below allows an

accurate measurement of the firing loop resistance.

The following sequence is used for diagnosis:

1. Test whether a short circuit or leakage resistance from the firing line to battery voltage or ground exists.

2. The firing loop capacitor is charged from the energy reserve through a resistor. The charging is interrupted

after a short time and the voltage across the firing loop capacitor is measured. This voltage is a measure of the

capacitance of the firing loop capacitor.

3. The squib resistance measurement is performed directly after the capacitance measurement by briefly

discharging the firing loop capacitor through the squib. The discharge of the capacitor is a measure of the loop

resistance.

PERIPHERAL ACCELERATION SENSOR (SIDE AIR BAG SENSOR)

The peripheral acceleration sensor (1) is a sensing

component which is mounted on the B pillars (3)

(one each side) which is able to detect lateral

acceleration, recognise a crash and send a signal

to the SDM that a side air bag deployment s ituation

exists or not.

The SDM can then decide whether to deploy the

relevant side air bag (the side facing the crash).

Peripheral acceleration sensors are only fitted to

vehicles with side air bags (8.1 SDM).

Due to the critical nature of the tor que specification

of the two nuts (4) securing the peripheral

acceleration sens or (1) to the m ounting brack et ( 2),

the peripheral acceleration sensor is serviced with

the mounting bracket as an assembly only.

If there is a need to remove the acceler ation s ensor

from the vehicle, it must be removed as an

assembly with the mounting bracket attached.

A peripheral acceleration sensor is designed for

a one time deployment use only. If a side air

bag deplo ys, the peripheral acceleration sensor

and mounting bracket assembly on the same

side as the deployed air bag must be replaced.

NOTE:

Figure 12M-22 shows the RHS peripheral

acceleration sensor, as peripheral acceleration

sensor are non handed, the LHS peripheral

acceleration sensor has the SRS wiring harness

facing the front of the vehicle.

Figure 12M-22 Peripheral Acceleration Sensor

CLOCK SPRING COIL ASSEMBLY

The clock spring c oil ass em bly remains unc hanged

from the 6.2 SRS for SRS 8.0 and 8.1, however, as

the illustration for the clock spring coil was

incorrectly labelled in Section 12M

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

(VERSION 6.2) in this Service Inform ation CD, this

information has been republished in full.

The clock spring coil assembly has the following

parts:

1. A pigtail wiring harness (3) that connects to

the air bag inflator module at the top of the

steering column (connector YB147).

2. A lower wiring harness connector which is

incorporated with the clock spring coil outer

housing assembly (2).

3. A rotating inner hub (1) which engages with

the rear of the steering wheel.

4. A ribbon wire assembly that provides an

unbroken connection between the SDM and

air bag inflator module as the s teer ing wheel is

rotated during vehicle operation.

5. The coil assembly also has pigtail wiring

harnesses and wires in the ribbon wire

assembly (4) for the horn contacts in the

steering wheel horn bar and, if fitted, the

remote audio controls (not shown).

The coil assembly operates in the following

manner:

When the steering wheel is in the straight-ahead

position, the inner hub and outer housing are

aligned to provide approximately 2.5 turns of the

steering wheel in either direction.

When the steering wheel is turned in a clockwise

direction (r ight turn), the inner hub winds the ribbon

wire as it rotates with the steering wheel.

When the steering wheel is turned in an anti-

clockwise direction (left turn), the inner hub

unwinds the ribbon wire as it rotates with the

steering wheel.

Figure 12M-23 Clock spring coil assembly

SIDE AIR BAG MODULE ASSEMBLY

The side air bag module assembly contains the following parts (refer to Fig. 12M-24):

A housing (1), fastened to the outboard side of the seat back frame with studs (2) and nuts (not shown).

A nylon fabric cushion folded around the housing and mounted in a plastic container (5).

A protective reinforcement paper (Tyvek) cover with the seam around the container (not shown for clarity).

An inflator (3) and wiring loom (4).

The side air bag deploys through the seat back foam and seat back fabric at approximately the forward most side

seam, providing a protective barrier between the occupant and the vehicle door.

WARNING:

COMPONENTS OF THE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE ARE NOT REPAIRABLE.

UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES ARE THE COMPONENTS OF THE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE TO BE

DISASSEMBLED. THE AIR BAG INFLA TOR CONTAINS COMPRESSED GAS AND A SMALL PYROTECHNIC

CHARGE. ADDITIONALLY, THE AIR BAG CUSHION FOLD IS CRITICAL TO AIR BAG PERFORMANCE AND

FRONT OCCUPANT SAFETY.

Figure 12M-24 SRS Side Air Bag Module Assembly

The inflator contains several components (refer to Fig. 12M-25 which shows a typical inflator assembly).

An Electro Explosive Device (EED also called an initiator) (4) which consists of an electrical heating element

covered with a mixture of sensitive pyrotechnical charge.

A small amount of fuel (3) and oxidiser (1).

Compressed inert gas (typically Argon) in a sealed chamber (2).

During deploy ment, the side air bag inflator operates in three stages:

1. The EED initiator receives current from the SDM, heating the sensitive pyrotechnic charge which ignites the

fuel.

2. The combustion of the fuel and oxidiser creates enough pressure to burst the disk(s), heating the compressed

gas and allowing it to escape into the cushion.

3. The heated expanding gas starts to unfold the air bag cushion, which separates the protective cover, the seat

back foam and the seat back fabric and inflates.

As the cushion inflates, some of the gas begins to exit into the passenger compartment through vent holes or

through the pores of the cushion fabric.

Internal tethering controls the fill and placement of the air bag to maximise the benefits to the front occupant.

Figure 12M-25 Typical side impact inflator construction

1. Oxygen 4. Initiator 7. Diffuser screen

2. Argon 5. Burst disk

3. Ethanol 6. Burst disk

WIRING HARNESS

The SRS wiring harness contains the necessary wiring to interconnect the various system components.

During the months of March through to May 1998, the SRS wiring harness was gradually changed from being

incorporated with the main wiring harness to being incorporated with the body wiring harness.

A second change to the body wiring harness was also made to all vehicles after August 1 1998. This change

introduced an additional earth circuit for the SDM (circuit 305).

These two wiring harness changes do not affect vehicles built with a 8.0 or 8.1 SDM, as 8.0 and 8.1 SDMs were

introduced after this period, however, do affect VT Series Models built with the earlier type 6.2 SDM.

If the SDM on a vehicle that was originally equipped with a 6.2 SDM becomes faulty, provided the vehicle was built

after August 1 1998 and the additional earth lead is provided, a 8.0 SDM may be used as a replacement.

If the vehicle was originally equipped with a 6.2 SDM and later replaced by an 8.0 SDM the diagnostic procedures in

this Section are to be used.

CAUTION:

Do not fit an 8.0 SDM to any vehicle that does not have the additional earth circuit (circuit 305). Although 6.2 and

8.0 SDMs are physically interchangeable, without the additional earth circuit, the SRS functionality may become less

reliable and impede the system operation.

NOTE:

TECH 2 is capable of identifying the SDM fitted to the vehicle, refer to 3.5 TECH 2 TEST MODES AND DISPLAYS

FOR SRS DIAGNOSIS in this Section.

An SRS wiring harness can be identified by the yellow PVC tubing or yellow tape covering the harness wiring. The

specific SRS wiring harness connectors are either coloured yellow, mustard or orange, or have a yellow retaining

clip or slide to identify them as SRS connectors.

The ‘pigtail’ wiring harness that connects to the side air bag module, and runs through the front seat down to the

seat rail, is not serviced separately from the side air bag inflator module due to the design of the anti back out

connector on the module assembly.

If this ‘pigtail’ wiring harness, as with any other SRS ‘pigtail’ wiring harness, becomes damaged no wire, connector

or terminal repairs are to be attempted. REPLACE THE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE AND PIGTAIL WIRING

HARNESS ASSEMBLY.

The connectors on the SRS wiring harness which

interface with the igniters have an in-built capacitor

which is connected in series with the trigger circuit.

The purpose of the capacitor is to prevent

unintentional triggering of the SRS by blocking any

Direct Current (DC) in the circuit.

Figure 12M-26 illustrates the SRS wiring harness

connector with an in-built capacitor. The connector

consists of:

1 Capacitor.

2 A ‘Service Hole’ to aid in

diagnosis of the system.

3 & 4. Terminals.

Due to the sensitive nature of the SRS circuitry,

special wiring repair procedures have been

developed.

As such, the procedures described in

2.8 SRS WIRING REPAIR in Section 12M

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM -

(VERSION 6.2) in this Service Information CD are

the only recommended and approved SRS wiring

repair m ethod. These procedures are to be read in

conjunction with 2.7 WIRING REPAIRS in this

Section.

No alternative repair methods are to be used.

Figure 12M-26 SRS wiring harness connectors

WARNING LABELS

In order to provide adequate warning of the SRS operation and service requirement to the vehicle's owner, driver or

service technicians, SRS warning labels are located on various components of the vehicle, refer to Fig. 12M-27.

IMPORTANT:

If at any time any these components are replaced, ensure that the appropriate warning label is applied to the

replacement part.

Figure 12M-27 SRS Warning Labels

1. Passenger’s side sun visor (vehicles with front

passenger’s air bag).

2. Driver’s side sun visor.

3. Steering wheel (horn bar and air bag inflator

removed).

4. Engine cooling fan shroud.

5. Left hand B pillar (vehicles with side air bags).

6. Right hand B pillar (vehicles with side air bags).

7. Left hand B pillar moulding (vehicles with side air

bags).

8. Right hand B pillar moulding (vehicles with side air

bags).

2. SERVICE OPERATIONS

2.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

1. Do not use a fast battery charger for starting the vehicle.

2. Never disconnect the battery from the vehicle's electrical system while the engine is running.

3. Disconnect the battery from the vehicle's electrical system before fast battery charging.

4. Never disconnect or connect the SDM connector with the ignition turned on.

5. After an accident, the individual SRS components must be replaced if the following circumstances apply:

a. Deformation of the SDM. (If the floor pan is deformed where the SDM is mounted, it must be repaired).

b. Deformation of the peripheral acceleration sensor or mounting bracket.

c. Deformation of the B pillar or surrounding area where the peripheral acceleration sensor and mounting

bracket assembly is mounted.

d. Pre-tensioners, horn bar and air bag inflator module, front passenger's air bag inflator module and side air

bag modules that have not been triggered, but are damaged.

e. Pre-tensioners, horn bar and air bag inflator module, front passenger's air bag inflator module, side air bag

inflator module, SDM, or deployed side peripheral acceleration sensor assemblies that have been triggered.

f. If a vehicle is involved in an accident which was severe enough to deploy the pre-tensioners but not severe

enough to deploy air bag/s, the following components must be replaced: Any seat belt worn in the accident,

seat belt pre-tensioners front seat guide rail and adjuster assembly (provided seat was occupied in

accident) and the SDM.

If a vehicle is involved in an accident where the seat belt pre-tensioners and the front air bag/s are

deployed, the following components must be replaced: the same components as in a pre-tensioner only

deployment, plus the horn bar and air bag inflator module assembly, SDM, clock spring coil, steering

column, steering, front passenger's air bag inflator module (vehicles with front passenger's air bag),

instrument panel pad and PAB door assembly (vehicles with front passenger's air bag), instrument panel

pad name plate (vehicles with front passenger's air bag), front passenger air bag inflator support rail

assembly (vehicles with front passenger's air bag).

If a vehicle is involved in an accident where a side air bag is deployed, the following components must be

replaced: any seat belt worn in the accident, SDM, relevant side front seat assembly and relevant side

peripheral acceleration sensor.

NOTE:

DAMAGED OR DEFECTIVE COMPONENTS OF THE SYSTEM MUST NOT BE REPAIRED, BUT MUST

ALWAYS BE REPLACED.

6. When fasteners are removed, always reinstall them in the same location from which they were removed. If a

fastener needs to be replaced, use a fastener with the correct part number for that application. If a fastener

with the correct part number is not available, a fastener of equal size and strength (or stronger) may be used.

Fasteners that should not be reused, and those requiring thread locking compound will be identified in this

Section. The correct torque value must be used when installing fasteners that require it. If these conditions are

not adhered to, parts or system damage could result.

7. The windshield plays an active part during the deployment of the front passenger's air bag. The strength of the

windshield and its urethane adhesive is critical to ensure that the front seat passenger is correctly protected

during deployment. Replacement windshield glass and adhesives complying to Holden's specifications may

only be used.

Only use the correct urethane adhesive when installing a windshield to maintain original installation integrity.

Failure to use the correct product will result in poor retention of the glass. For vehicles with front passenger

side air bag, the windshield must be replaced properly so that occupant protection provided by the SRS is

maintained.

8. Sensing and Diagnostic Module.

Take care when handling the SDM. Never strike or jar the module or body structure adjacent to the module in a

manner which could cause deployment of the pre-tensioner’s or air bag/s.

If an SDM is dropped from a height, greater than one metre, it must be replaced.

9. Peripheral acceleration sensor.

Take care when handling the peripheral acceleration sensor. Never strike or jar the module or body structure

adjacent to the sensor in a manner which could cause deployment of the side air bag/s. Never carry a

peripheral acceleration sensor by the wiring harness leads.

If a peripheral acceleration sensor is dropped from a height, greater than on metre, it must be replaced.

10. Undeployed air bag inflator module.

When carrying a live (undeployed) air bag inflator module, ensure that it is pointed away from you. In case of

an accidental deployment, the air bag will then deploy with minimal chance of injury.

When placing a live air bag inflator module on a bench or other surface, always face the assembly up, away

from the surface. This is necessary in order to provide free space for the air bag to expand, in case of

accidental deployment. Also, never place anything on top of air bag inflator module.

Never carry the driver's air bag inflator module by the horn bar contact wires on the underside of the assembly.

Never carry a side air bag inflator module by the wiring harness leads.

If still connected, never carry the front passenger's inflator module, or pre-tensioner’s by their w iring harness

lead.

Do not apply power to the module except as specified in this Section.

Do not attempt to make any repairs to the module or sensors. A damaged or defective horn bar and air bag

inflator module, front passenger's air bag inflator module or side air bag inflator module assembly must be

replaced.

Do not weld, solder, braze, hammer, machine, drill, or otherwise heat seat belt pre-tensioners or air bag inflator

modules.

11. Deployed air bag inflator module/s.

Always wear gloves and safety glasses when handling a deployed pre-tensioner or air bag inflator module. The

surface of these components may contain chemicals (eg. Sodium Hydroxide) as a result of the gas generated

during combustion. This can irritate your skin. Wash hands with mild soap and water afterwards.

12. Steering column.

During any service operation that requires removal and reinstallation of a steering column fitted with an air bag

inflator module, always carry the steering column with two hands and with the steering wheel away from your

body. Never carry the column by one hand or with steering wheel tow ard you.

Never set a steering column on the floor with the steering wheel toward the floor.

NOTE:

During any service operation that requires removal of a steering column, ensure that the steering shaft is locked to

the column to prevent any possibility of allowing the steering shaft to rotate and possibly damaging the clock spring

coil ribbon wire. For details of locking the steering shaft to the column, refer to Section 9A, STEERING in this

Service Information CD.

CAUTION:

When performing service on or around SRS components or wiring, follow the procedures listed in this

Section to temporarily disable the SRS. Failure to follow these procedures could result in possible SRS

deployment, personal injury or otherwise unnecessary SRS repairs.

13. Disconnecting the battery WILL NOT immediately deactivate the SRS. A residual energy reserve in the SDM is

incorporated to enable the pre-tensioners and air bag/s to deploy in the event of a battery failure. The SDM has

the power to deploy the air SRS for up to 10 seconds after the battery has been disconnected or the ignition

turned off.

14. The SDM can maintain sufficient voltage to cause a deployment for up to 10 seconds after the ignition switch is

turned OFF or the battery is disconnected. Many of the service operations require disconnection of the battery

to avoid an accidental deployment of the pre-tensioners or air bag/s.

15. When carrying out steering gear removal and installation procedures, remove the ignition key from the ignition

lock and ensure that the steering column is locked. If this operation is not carried out and the steering wheel is

spun while the steering gear is removed, the clock spring coil will be destroyed. This will result in the SDM

setting a DTC and non-deployment of the driver’s air bag.

Figure 12M-28

2.2 SYSTEM DISABLING AND ENABLING PROCEDURE

DISABLING THE SRS

NOTE:

This disabling procedure applies only to VT Series Models which have an AC firing SRS. Conventional SRS

with DC firing such as VS Series Models have a more complex disabling procedure. Always refer to the

appropriate Service Information CD for S RS disabling and enabling procedures.

Disconnect both the battery earth and power leads and wait at least 10 seconds before performing any work on the

vehicle.

CAUTION:

The SDM can maintain sufficient voltage to cause SRS deployment for up to 10 s econds after the ignition

switch is turned OFF or the battery is disconnected.

ENABLING THE SRS

NOTE:

Ensure all wiring harness connectors are connected before reconnecting the battery leads.

1. Reconnect both the battery power and earth leads.

2. Switch ignition on, and observe the SRS warning lamp in the instrument cluster. The warning lamp should be

illuminated for approximately 5 seconds. During this period the SDM performs a wiring and self check.

If no system faults are detected, the SRS warning lamp will be switched off. If the warning lamp remains

illuminated and an audible alarm chimes, or the warning lamp illuminates 2 seconds after it was originally

switched off, an SRS fault is present. Refer to 3 DIAGNOSTICS in this Section to rectify fault.

2.3 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE ASSEMBLY

NOTE:

Due to the critical nature of how the side air bag

wiring harness is routed and retained to the seat,

the seat must be rem oved to ensure this routing is

correct when installing the side air bag module

assembly. If the side air bag module’s wiring

harness is not routed and retained correctly,

damage to the wiring harness may occur, resulting

in the side air bag becoming inoperative and a DTC

being set.

REMOVE

1. Position the relevant front seat to obtain the

easiest access to the four seat retaining bolts

and, if poss ible, the seat should be fully raised

and the seat back tilted forward.

2. Disable the SRS, refer to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND ENABLING PROCEDURE

in this Section.

3. If removing the driver’s seat, remove the

retaining scr ew (1) f rom the driver’s s ide outer

front guide rail cover.

4. Using a small screwdriver, push in the centre

of the front (3) and rear (2) outer seat guide

rail covers where the two parts meet.

5. Remove the front outer guide rail covers by

lifting the outer edge of the front cover up and

pulling it forward. Lift driver’s outer front seat

guide rail cover over fuel filler door release

lever.

6. Lift the two rear guide rail covers up and off

the guide rails.

Figure 12M-29

7. Disconnect seat ( 3), s eat belt pre-tens ioner (2)

and side air bag module (1) wiring harness

connectors from outer side of the relevant

seat.

Figure 12M-30

Techline

8. Remove the four bolts securing the front seat

to the floor and remove seat.

Figure 12M-31

9. On vehicles with four-way seat electric seats,

remove the screw (2) securing side inner

cover (1) to seat and remove inner side cover.

Figure 12M-32

10. On vehicles with a four-way electric seat, from

the inner side of the seat assem bly, gently tap

the recliner shaft towards the outer side of the

seat assembly (approximately 1 - 2 cm) using

a pin punch.

11. On vehicles with a four-way electric seat, fully

withdraw the seat back reclining knob and

recliner shaft assembly (1) from the seat

assembly.

12. Remove the screw (2) from the front of the

outer side cover (3).

13. Remove the front seat outer side cover

fastener (4) by rotating fastener anti-clockwise

(one quarter turn) and remove the screw (5)

located behind this fastener.

14. Gently pull outer cover away from seat back

recliner (clip either side of recliner frame).

15. Reach up under the seat assembly and

squeeze the retaining tangs (6) together (2

positions) on the inner side of the outer cover

while gently pulling the outer cover.

NOTE:

Only remove outer c over far enough away from the

seat cushion assembly to gain access to the seat

adjusting switch wiring harness.

16. Disconnect seat adjusting switch wiring

harness at the switch and remove outer cover

and switch assembly. Figure 12M-33

17. Insert a screwdriver between the seat back

cover (1) and seat back (2) and push up on

the lower retaining clip (3) (2 places) while

pulling the bottom of the back cover out, away

from seat, to release lower retaining clips.

If the seat is not equipped with a lumbar

support, pull the back seat cover down to

release the top retainers (4) and remove seat

back cover.

If the seat is equipped with a lumbar support,

refer to step 18 before pulling the seat back

cover down.

Figure 12M-34

18. From the front side of the seat back cover, in

front of the lumbar support knob, pull the seat

back cover outwards from the seat assembly

to disengage the lumbar support knob.

While holding the side of the seat back cover

out, pull the seat back cover down to release

the top seat back cover retainers, refer Fig.

12M-34 (4). Remove seat back cover.

Figure 12M-35

19. While holding head restraint height adjuster

lock in, pull head restraint completely out of

guide.

20. From the back of front seat, squeeze the

lock ing prongs of head r es traint guide together

while pulling top of guide out of seat back

assembly.

Figure 12M-36

21. Pull the four ‘J’ strips away from the seat

frame.

22. Lift cover and pad assembly away from seat

back frame.

Figure 12M-37

23. Taking care not to damage the wiring harnes s,

cut the wire ties (f ive places) s ecuring the side

air bag module ‘pigtail’ wiring harness to the

front seat assembly.

Figure 12M-38

24. Loosen and remove the two nuts securing the

side air bag assembly to the front seat back

frame.

25. Remove side air bag module and ‘pigtail’

wiring harness assembly from front seat back

frame.

CAUTION:

When carrying a live (undeployed) side air bag

inflator module assembly, make sure the bag

opening is pointed away from you. Never carry

the side air bag inflator module assembly by

the wiring harness or connectors. In case of an

accidental deployment, the bag will then deploy

with minimal chance of injury.

When placing a live side air bag inflator module

assembly on a bench or other surface, always

face the air bag opening up, away from the

surface. Never rest the air bag inflator module

assembly with the opening face down. This is

necessary so that a free space is provided to

allow t he air b ag t o exp and in t he u nlikely ev en t

of accidental deployment. Otherwise, personal

injury may result.

Figure 12M-39

REINSTALL

1. Install the side air bag and ‘pigtail’ wiring

harness assembly into position on the front

seat back frame.

2. Install side air bag to front seat back frame

retaining nuts and tighten to the correct torque

specification.

SIDE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY TO FRONT

SEAT BACK FRAME RETAINING NUT 5 - 6 Nm

TORQUE SPECIFICATION

3. Route side air bag ‘pigtail’ wiring harness

through to the side of the seat frame and

secure with five new wire ties as per Fig 12M-

41.

NOTE:

If the side air bag module’s wiring harness is

not routed and retained correctly, damage to

the wiring harness may occur, resulting in the

side air bag becoming inoperative and a DTC

being set.

Figure 12M-40

Figure 12M-41

4. Position the seat back cover and pad

assembly over the seat back frame and pull

the four ‘J’ strips over the seat back frame.

5. Insert the head restraint guides into the seat

back, ensuring that the locating slots in the

seat back align with the key-way on the head

restraint guide and the head restraint guide

with the adjusting lock is installed on the

correct side, ie. side with notches on the head

restraint. Push the guides down into the seat

back until they lock into position.

6. Install the head res traint into the head res traint

guides.

Figure 12M-42

7. Install the seat back cover assembly onto the

seat assembly as per the following:

locate the two upper retaining clips on the seat

back cover with the seat back (ref er Fig. 12M-

34 in this Section).

If the vehicle is fitted with a lumbar support,

pull the side of the seat back cover out, align

the splines on the lumbar support knob and

adaptor with the splines on the lumbar support

shaft. Push lumbar support knob and adaptor

onto lumbar support shaft.

Push the seat back cover into the seat back,

to engage the two lower retaining clips (refer

Fig. 12M-34 in this Section).

Figure 12M-43

8. Position the front seat outer side cover (3) in

place and connect the seat adjusting switch

wiring harness to the seat adjusting switch.

9. Align the front seat outer side cover retaining

clips and locking tangs with the seat frame,

and push the outer side cover onto the seat

frame until the retaining clips and tangs

engage.

10. Install and tighten the outer side cover

retaining screws (2 & 5) and the fastener (4).

11. On vehicles with four -way electric s eats, install

the recliner shaft and knob assembly (1),

ensuring the splines are aligned evenly and

the seat back is not twisted.

Figure 12M-44

12. On vehicles with four-way seat electric seats,

reinstall inner side cover (1) and tighten

securing screw (2) to the seat frame

assembly.

Figure 12M-45

13. Position the front seat assembly into the

vehicle.

14. Install the four bolts securing the front seat to

the floor and tighten to the correct torque

specification.

FRONT SEAT TO FLOOR SECURING 35 - 50

BOLT TORQUE SPECIFICATION Nm

Figure 12M-46

15. Connect seat (3), pre-tensioner (2) and side

air bag module (1) wiring harness connectors.

16. Align the front outer seat guide r ail cover’s two

retaining clips and push firmly to engage.

NOTE:

The two retaining clips c an be aligned by using the

alignment marks on the upper side of the cover,

refer to Fig. 12M-29, (4).

17. Push the front of the outer seat guide rail

cover down to engage cover with front of seat

rail.

18. If installing the driver’s side outer seat guide

rail cover, install the screw at the front of the

front outer seat guide rail cover.

19. Install the rear outer seat guide rail cover

lower rear retainer over the seat guide rail and

push rear outer seat guide rail cover forward to

engage with front outer seat guide rail cover.

20. Enable the SRS, refer to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND ENABLING PROCEDURE

in this Section.

21. Switch ignition on, and observe the SRS

warning lamp in the instrument cluster. The

warning lamp should be illuminated for

approximately 5 seconds. During this period

the SDM performs a wiring and system self

check.

If no system faults are detected, the SRS

warning lamp will be switched off. If the

warning lamp remains illuminated and an

audible alarm chimes, or the warning lamp

illuminates 2 seconds after it was originally

switched off, an SRS fault is present. Refer to

3 DIAGNOSTICS in this Section to rectify fault.

22. Check operation of front seat mechanical and

electrical adjustments / operation. While

check ing the seat adjustment / operation, also

check to ensure that the side air bag ‘pigtail’

harness does not foul with any of the seats

moveable components (ie. seat motor drive

shafts, etc.).

Figure 12M-47

SIDE AIR BAG MODULE ASSEMBLY SCRAPPING PROCEDURE

During the course of a vehicle's useful life, certain

situations may arise which will necessitate the

disposal of a live (undeployed) side air bag inflator

module as s embly. The f ollowing inf or mation c over s

proper procedures for deploying a live side air bag

assembly.

CAUTION:

Failure to follow proper Supplemental Restraint

System (SRS) side air bag inflator module

assembly disposal procedures can result in air

bag deployment which may cause personal

injury. The undeployed air bag inflator module

contains substances that can cause severe

illness or personal injury if the sealed cont ainer

is damaged during disposal.

In situations which require deployment of a live side

air bag inflator module assembly, deployment may

only be accomplished outside the vehicle.

The side air bag inflator module needs to be

removed so the SRS wiring harness with the

capacitor built into the connector can be removed.

Intentional deployment of the side air bag inflator

module can not be accomplished using a 12 volt

DC supply with the capacitor in the SRS circuit.

NOTE:

Due to an anti-back-out lug being moulded into the

plastic housing of the side air bag m odule, it will be

necessar y to cut part of the hous ing away from the

air bag module to disconnect the SRS wiring

harness connector from the air bag module.

SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DEPLOYMENT

OUTSIDE VEHICLE

There m ay be some cir cum stanc es that requir e the

deployment of a side air bag inflator module

assembly before a vehicle is to be returned to

service. For example, situations in which the

vehicle will be returned to an owner after a

functionally malfunctioning side air bag inflator

module assembly is replaced. Deployment and

disposal of a malf unctioning air bag inf lator module

is, of course, subject to any required retention

period.

For deployment of a live (undeployed) side air bag

inflator module assembly outside the vehicle, the

deployment procedure must be followed exactly.

Always wear safety glasses during the deployment

procedure until the assembly is removed. Before

performing the procedure you should be familiar

with servicing the SRS and with proper handling of

the side air bag inflator module assembly.

The following must be read fully and understood

before performing the actual procedure.

The following procedure requires use of special

tools; J38826-1 SRS deployment harness with

adaptor E1992. Do not attempt procedure without

J38826-1 and E1992.

CAUTION:

Failure to follow procedures in the order listed

may result in personal injury. Never connect

deployment harness to any power source

before connecting deployment harness to the

side air bag inflator module assembly. The

deployment harness must remain shorted and

not be connected to a power source until the

side air bag inflator module assembly is ready

to be deployed. The module will immediately

deploy the air bag when a power source is

connected to it. Wear safety glasses and gloves

throughout this entire deployment and disposal

procedure.

1. Turn ignition switch OFF and put on safety

glasses.

2. Inspect J38826-1 SRS deployment harness

(1) and adaptor, E1992 (2) for damage. If

harness or adaptor is damaged, discard and

obtain a replacement.

3. Short two SRS deployment harness leads

together by fully seating one banana plug into

the other. SRS deployment harness MUST

remain shorted and NOT connected to a

power source until the air bag is to be

deployed.

4. Connect adaptor E1992 to the SRS

deployment harness J38826-1.

CAUTION:

SRS deployment harness must remain shorted

and not connected to a power source until the

air bag is to be deployed. Figure 12M-48

5. Remove relevant side air bag inflator module

assem bly fr om vehicle, ref er to 2.3 SIDE AIR

BAG MODULE ASSEMBLY in this Section.

CAUTION:

When carrying a live (undeployed) side air bag

inflator module assembly, make sure the bag

opening is pointed away from you. Never carry

the side air bag inflator module assembly by

the wiring harness or connectors. In case of an

accidental deployment, the bag will then deploy

with minimal chance of injury.

When placing a live side air bag inflator module

assembly on a bench or other surface, always

face the air bag opening up, away from the

surface. Never rest the air bag inflator module

assembly with the opening face down. This is

necessary so that a free space is provided to

allow the air bag to expand in th e un likely event

of accidental deployment. Otherwise, personal

injury may result.

6. Using a piece of angle iron (approximately

60cm long) drill two holes on one surface that

will allow it to be bolted to a piece of square

steel tubing (refer Step 9.).

On the other sur fac e of the angle ir on, drill two

more holes that are suitably sized and

positioned to allow the side air bag to be

attached to it.

Using the existing air bag retaining studs and

appropriate nuts, attach the side air bag

assembly to the angle iron, ensuring the

opening of the air bag will be able to face

upwards when bolted to the square steel

tubing.

Figure 12M-49

NOTE:

The side air bag module plastic housing has an

anti-back-out lug (2) moulded into it which will

prevent the SRS wiring harness c onnector (1) fr om

being disconnected. Due to the in-built capacitor in

this connector, a side air bag cannot be

intentionally deployed with this connector in the

circuit, therefore, it will be necessary to cut part of

the side air bag housing away from the side air bag

module assembly to allow the SRS wiring harness

connector be disconnected.

7. Clamp angle iron (with side air bag attached)

in a vice with the air bag opening facing

upwards. Using a hack saw, cut the end off

the side air bag module plas tic hous ing so that

it will enable the SRS wiring harness

connector (1), with in-built capacitor, to be

disconnected from the side air bag module

(refer to Fig. 12M-50).

8. Disconnect SRS wiring harness from side air

bag module assembly.

Figure 12M-50

9. Using a 2 metre long square steel tube and

suitable nuts and bolts, attach the angle iron

and side air bag module assembly to the

centre of the square steel tube.

Figure 12M-51

10. Clear a space on the ground about 2 m etres in

diameter where the assembly is to be

deployed. A paved, outdoor location where

there is no activity is preferred. If an outdoor

location is not available, a space on the

workshop floor where there is no activity and

sufficient ventilation is recommended. Ensure

no loose or flammable objects are within the

deployment area.

11. Position two wheel and tyre assemblies on

each end of the square steel tubing, ensuring

the side air bag module’s opening is facing

upwards.

Figure 12M-52

12. Extend the SRS deployment harness (1) and

adaptor (2) to its full length from the side air

bag module.

13. Place a power source near the shorted end of

the SRS deployment harness. Recommended

application:

12 volts minimum, 2 amps minimum

(a vehicle battery is suggested).

Figure 12M-53

14. Connect the adaptor E1992 (1) and SRS

deployment harness lead J38826-1 (2) to the

side bag inflator module assembly (3).

CAUTION:

SRS deployment harness must remain shorted

and not connected to a power source until the

air bag is to be deployed. The inflator module

will immediately deploy the air bag when a

power source is connected to it.

15. Verify that the area around the side air bag

inflator module assembly is clear of all people

and loose or flammable objects.

16. Verify that the side air bag inflator module

assembly is resting with the air bag facing up.

17. Notify all people in the immediate area that

you intend to deploy the side air bag inflator

module assembly. The deployment will be

accompanied by an explosion which may

startle the uninformed. Figure 12M-54

18. Separate the two banana plugs on the SRS

deployment harness.

NOTE: 1.

W hen the air bag deploys, the rapid gas expansion

will create an explosion. Notify all people in the

immediate area that you intend to deploy the

module.

NOTE: 2.

W hen the air bag deploys, the assem bly m ay jump

vertically. This is a norm a l reac tion of the module to

the force of the rapid gas expansion inside the air

bag.

CAUTION:

The deployment harness MUST remain shorted

and NOT connected t o a pow er sou rce until the

air bag is to be deployed. The module will

immediately deploy the air bag when a power

source is connected to it. Connecting the

deployment harness to the power source

should always be the last step prior to

deployment of the air bag. Failure to follow

procedures in the order listed may result in

personal injury.

19. Connect SRS deployment harness leads to

the power source to immediately deploy the

side air bag inflator module assembly.

NOTE:

Should this procedure fail to deploy the air bag for

any reason, provided it is not due to a discharged

deploym ent battery or a faulty deployment harnes s,

contact Holden Ltd for advise.

Figure 12M-55

Figure 12M-56

20. Disconnect the SRS deployment harness from the power source.

21. Short the two SRS deployment harness leads together by fully seating one banana plug into the other.

22. Disconnect the adaptor E1992 from the module as soon as possible after deployment. This will prevent

damage to the adaptor or SRS deployment harness. The adaptor and SRS deployment harness are designed

to be reused. They should, however, be inspected for damage after each deployment and replaced if

necessary.

23. Dispose of the deployed side air bag module assembly through normal refuse channels.

2.4 SE NS I NG AND DIAGNOSTIC MODULE (S DM)

REMOVE

1. Disable the SRS, refer to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND ENABLING PROCEDURE

in this Section.

2. Remove the centr e console assem bly, refer to

Section 1A3 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND

CONSOLE in this Service Information CD.

3. Using a number T30H Torx bit, Tool No.

ETX30H and suitable holder such as Tool No.

J25359-8, loosen and remove the SDM to floor

attaching screw (1) with the earth lead

attached to it

4. Lift up SRS wiring harness connector locking

lever (2) and pull harness connector (3) out of

SDM.

Figure 12M-57

5. Using the number T30H Torx bit, Tool No.

ETX30H and suitable holder such as Tool No.

J25359-8, loosen and remove the remaining

two SDM to floor attaching screws (1).

6. Remove SDM.

Figure 12M-58

REINSTALL

Installation of the SDM is the reverse of removal

procedures, noting the following points:

1. Ensure that the directional arrow on the SDM

identification label is pointing towards the front

of the vehicle.

2. Install the the SRS wiring harness earth lead

to the left hand rear SDM retaining screw.

3. Using a number T30H Torx bit, Tool No.

ETX 30H and suitable holder such as T ool No.

J25359-8, tighten SDM to floor attaching

screws to the correct torque specification.

NOTE:

It is very important that the SDM is mounted

securely to the floor. The screws must be

tightened to the correct torque specification

and not exceeded.

SENSING AND DIAGNOSTIC

MODULE TO FLOOR

ATTACHING SCREW

TORQUE SPECIFICATION

7 - 11

Techline

4. Connect the SRS wiring harness connector,

ensuring that the connec tor is fully seated into

SDM module and the locking lever is locked

down.

5. Enable the SRS, refer to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND ENABLING PROCEDURE

in this Section.

6. Switch ignition on, and observe the SRS

warning lamp in the instrument cluster. The

warning lamp should be illuminated for

approximately 5 seconds. During this period

the SDM performs a wiring and self check.

If no system faults are detected, the SRS

warning lamp will be switched off. If the

warning lamp remains illuminated and an

audible alarm chimes, or the warning lamp

illuminates 2 seconds after it was originally

switched off, an SRS fault is pr esent. Ref er to

3 DIAGNOSTICS in this Section to rectify

fault.

2.5 PE RIP HERAL ACCELERATION SENSO R (SIDE AIR BAG SENSOR)

REMOVE

1. Disable the SRS, refer to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND ENABLING PROCEDURE

in this Section.

2. If removing the driver’s side peripheral

acceleration sensor, remove the retaining

screw (1) from the driver’s side outer front

guide rail cover.

3. Using a small screwdriver, push in the centre

of the front (3) and rear (2) outer seat guide

rail covers where the two parts meet.

4. Remove the front outer guide rail covers by

lifting the outer edge of the front cover up and

pulling it forward. Lift driver’s outer front seat

guide rail cover over fuel filler door release

lever.

5. Lift the two rear guide rail covers up and off

the guide rails.

Figure 12M-59

6. From the top of the lower B pillar trim (1),

gently lever trim out away from B pillar to

release the two retaining clips (2).

7. Lift lower B pillar trim up to disengage it from

the rocker panel trim, and remove the lower B

pillar trim.

Figure 12M-60

8. Gently pry the front (1) and rear (2) rocker

panel cover ins erts f rom the r ock er panel cover

(3).

9. Loosen and remove the rocker panel cover

retaining screw (seven places), and remove

rocker panel cover.

Figure 12M-61

10. Disconnect peripheral acceleration sensor

wiring harness connector (2) from peripheral

acceleration sensor and bracket assembly (1).

11. Loosen and remove the bolt (3) retaining the

peripheral acceleration sensor and bracket

assembly (together with seat belt retractor

assembly) to the B pillar.

NOTE:

Do not loosen or unsc rew the two nuts retaining the

peripheral acceleration sensor to the mounting

bracket. The peripheral acceleration sensor is only

serviced with the mounting bracket as an assembly.

12. Remove the peripheral acc eleration s ens or and

bracket assembly from the B pillar.

Figure 12M-62

REINSTALL

Installation of the peripheral acceleration sensor

and brack et as s embly is the reverse of the r emoval

procedure, noting the following:

1. Tighten peripheral acceleration sensor and

mounting bracket assembly retaining bolt

(front seat belt retractor retaining bolt) to the

correct torque specification.

PERIPHERAL ACCELERATION

SENSOR AND BRACKET

ASSEMBLY RETAINING BOLT

(FRONT SEAT BELT RETRACTOR

RETAINING BOLT)

TORQUE SPECIFICATION

35 - 50

2. Enable the SRS, refer to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND ENABLING PROCEDURE

in this Section.

3. Switch ignition on, and observe the SRS

warning lamp in the instrument cluster. The

warning lamp should be illuminated for

approximately 5 seconds. During this period

the SDM performs a wiring and self check.

If no system faults are detected, the SRS

warning lamp will be switched off. If the

warning lamp remains illuminated and an

audible alarm chimes, or the warning lamp

illuminates 2 seconds after it was originally

switched off, an SRS fault is pr esent. Ref er to

3. DIAGNOSTICS in this Section to rectify

fault.

2.6 REPAIRS AND INSPECTIONS REQUIRED AFTER AN ACCIDENT

If any SRS components are damaged, they must be replaced. If SRS component mounting points are damaged,

they must be repaired or replaced.

Never use SRS components from another vehicle.

CAUTION:

Proper operation of the SRS requires that any repairs to the vehicle structure must return it to its original

production configuration.

The steering column must be dimensionally inspected, whether deployment occurred or not, refer to

Section 9A STEERING, Checking Steering Column for Accident Damage in this Service Information CD.

If a vehicle is involved in an accident which was s evere enough to deploy the pre-tensioners but not severe enough

to deploy air bag/s, the following components must be replaced:

Any seat belt worn in the accident.

Seat belt pre-tensioners.

Front seat guide rail and adjuster assembly (provided seat was occupied in accident).

Sensing and Diagnostic Module.

If a vehicle is involved in an accident where the seat belt pre-tensioners and the front air bag/s are deployed, the

following components must be replaced:

Any seat belt worn in the accident.

Seat belt pre-tensioners.

Front seat guide rail and adjuster assemblies (provided seat was occupied in accident).

Horn bar and air bag inflator module assembly.

Sensing and Diagnostic Module.

Clock spring coil.

Steering column.

Steering wheel.

The front passenger's air bag inflator module (vehicles with front passenger's air bag).

The instrument panel pad and PAB door assembly (vehicles with front passenger's air bag).

Instrument panel pad name plate (vehicles with front passenger's air bag).

Front passenger air bag inflator support rail assembly (vehicles with front passenger's air bag).

If a vehicle is involved in an accident where a side air bag is deployed, the following components must be replaced:

Any seat belt worn in the accident.

Sensing and Diagnostic Module.

Relevant side front seat assembly.

Relevant side peripheral acceleration sensor.

2.7 WIRING RE P AIRS

Special wiring harness repair procedures have been developed for use on the Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS) due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. These procedures remain unchanged from those detailed in

Section 12M SUPPLEM ENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (VERSION 6.2) in this Service Information CD, noting the

following:

The ‘pigtail’ wiring harness that connects to the side air bag module, and runs through the front seat down to the

seat rail, is not serviced separately from the side air bag inflator module due to the design of the anti-back-out

connector on the module assembly.

If this ‘pigtail’ wiring harnes s, as with any other SRS ‘pigtail’ wiring harness, becomes damaged no wire, connector

or terminal repairs are to be attempted. REPLACE THE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE AND PIGTAIL WIRING

HARNESS ASSEMBLY.

3. DIAGNOSTICS

3.1 BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED

Before attempting to diagnose the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) you must have a good understanding of

electrical system basics and the use of circuit testing tools. Without this basic knowledge it will be difficult to use the

diagnostic procedures detailed in this Section.

Some electrical basics, as well as basic troubleshooting procedures and hints of the use of circuit testing tools are

covered in Section 12P, WIRING DIAGRAMS in this Service Information CD.

Basic Electrical Circuits - You should understand the basic theory of electricity, series and parallel circuits, and

voltage drops across series resistors. You should know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and

resistance (ohms). You should understand what happens in a circuit with an open or shorted wire (shorted either to

voltage or earth). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram.

Additionally, a knowledge of AC theory including; inductance, capacitance and impedance would be useful.

Use of Circuit Testing Tools - You should know how to use a jumper lead to test circuits. You should be familiar

with the use of a high input impedance (10 Mohm) digital type multimeter such as Tool No. J39200 or equivalent

and be able to measure voltage, current, and resistance. You should be familiar with the proper use of the TECH 2

Diagnostic Scan Tool.

Techline

3.2 PRELIMINARY SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS

When investigating any complaint of an SRS problem or malfunction, always begin diagnosis with a circuit check,

refer to 3.6 DIAGNOSTICS CHARTS, CHART A - DIAGNOSTIC CIRCUIT CHECK in this Section.

The diagnostic circuit check is a preliminary procedure that checks to ensure the SDM is communicating on the

serial data line as well as helping to identify the problem and directing the reader to the appropriate diagnostic chart

in this Section.

3.3 SRS SELF DIAGNOSTICS

The SRS has a self diagnostic facility that can detect and isolate SRS problems or failures. When a problem or

failure is detected, the Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) sets a fault code that represents that particular

problem or failure. Fault codes will cause the SRS warning lamp to be illuminated and depending on the fault, the

SDM may disable the SRS.

If present, diagnosable system faults are detected by the SDM during an initialisation process when the ignition is

first turned on. Upon first detection of an external system fault condition, the SDM records the failure and is classed

as an 'Intermittent Failure'. If the fault condition is maintained to meet the failure duration conditions for the

individual system problem (approximately 3 - 5 seconds), the fault then becomes a current Diagnostic Trouble Code

(DTC). If the fault duration conditions are not met, the intermittent fault is cleared from the SDM.

Current DTCs are permanently stored in the SDM's memory. When the fault conditions are no longer met, the DTC

will become a History DTC.

CURRENT DTC’S

Current DTCs when detected are stored in the SDM's RAM during the current ignition cycle and then maintained in

an EEPROM. Current DTCs are set or cleared based on the condition of the SRS during ignition on or continuous

monitoring of the current ignition cycle.

NOTE:

A current DTC can be identified on the TECH 2 display by the word ‘Current’ between the DTC number and the

DTC description. The word ‘History’ between the DTC number and the DTC description indicates that the DTC

displayed is a history DTC.

Current DTCs will be reset to History DTCs upon the next diagnostic test sequence that the fault conditions are not

met. Current DTCs can be cleared (changed to history DTC) by removing the fault conditions.

TECH 2 is unable to clear current DTCs if the fault conditions still exist; TECH 2 will display ‘Clear DTC Information

Failed’.

DTCs stored in the SDM memory can only be displayed and / or cleared using the TECH 2 diagnostic scan tool

The TECH 2 communicates with SDM serial data via the Data Link Connector (DLC), which is attached to the

instrument panel lower right hand trim, to the right of the steering column (refer to 3.4 TECH 2 DIAGNOSTICS in

this Section).

HISTORY DTC’S

History DTCs are set upon the clearing of a current DTC fault condition. History DTCs are maintained by the SDM

over multiple ignition cycles in the EEPROM. The SDM can only clear history DTCs from its EEPROM by a clear

DTCs serial data message via TECH 2.

CLEARING FAULT CODES

Once any system fault has been rectified, any fault codes stored in the Sensing and Diagnostic Module's memory

can be erased by using TECH 2 "Clear DTCs" selection, refer to 3.4 TECH 2 DIAGNOSTICS in this Section.

IMPORTANT:

Once DTCs have been cleared, be sure to verify proper system operation and absence of any fault codes

when clearing procedure is completed.

If TECH 2 displays “Clear DTC Information Failed” after attempting to clear DTCs, the fault condition still

exists.

3.4 TECH 2 DIAGNOSTICS

TECH 2, with the appropriate software, cables and

adaptors, when connected to the Data Link

Connector (DLC) is capable of reading SRS serial

data. The DLC is connected to the instrument panel

lower right hand trim, to the right of the steering

column.

For additional general information on connecting

and operating TECH 2, refer to

Section 0C TECH 2 in this Service Information CD.

DLC

DLC ADAPTOR

DLC CABLE

TECH 2

Figure 12M-63

TECH 2 has four test modes for diagnosing the

SRS. The four test modes are as follows:

MODE F0: NORMAL MODE

In this mode, the TECH 2 monitors the

communication between control modules on the

serial data line. The information displayed on the

TECH 2 screen in this mode is what the SDM is

communicating to the other modules via the serial

data line.

MODE F1: DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES

If F1: Diagnostic Trouble Codes is selected, a

selection list is displayed which contains:

F0: Read DTC Information - Once this mode is

selected, both current and history Diagnostic

Trouble Codes (DTCs) stored in the control

modules memory may be displayed.

F1: Clear DTC Information - once this mode is

selected, DTCs stored in the control module

memory may be cleared.

MODE F2: DATA DISPLAY

In this test mode, TECH 2 displays the status of

inputs and outputs of the SRS.

MODE F3: SNAPSHOT

In this test mode, the TECH 2 captures SRS data

before and after a forced manual trigger.

Figure 12M-64

3.5 TECH 2 TEST MODES AND DISPLAYS FOR SRS DIAGNOSIS

A prerequisite to this diagnostic section is for the

user to be familiar with the proper use of TECH 2,

the following pages illustrate only the major TECH

2 screen displays and provide a brief explanation of

their function for diagnosing the SRS. If additional

information is r equired on the operation of TECH 2,

reference should be made to either Section 0C

TECH 2 in this Service Information CD or the

TECH 2 User’s Guide.

SYSTEM SELECT MENU

With TECH 2 connected to the DLC, the ‘F0:

Diagnostics’ selected from the Main Menu, the

correct Model Year and Vehicle Type must be

selected for access to the System Select Menu.

Select F3: Body.

This mode contains all functions to test, diagnose,

monitor and program the vehicles body systems

including the SRS as well as providing the

opportunity to check all DTCs that may be set in the

vehicle.

Figure 12M-65

BODY APPLICATION MENU

Once “F3: Body” has been selected from the

System Select Menu, SRS can be selected.

Select SRS.

NOTE:

If information regarding DTCs set for the vehicle is

required, select DTC Check and press enter to

continue. To return to the “SRS” mode option from

the “DTC Check” mode option screen display,

simply press the EXIT key on TECH 2.

Once the “SRS” has been selected, the following

two Syst em Identific ation screens will appear which

require action. Figure 12M-66

SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION

Turn the ignition ON (as requested) and press the

CONFIRM soft key to continue.

Figure 12M-67

The System Identification screen will then display

the control module part number, production date

and type of c ontrol module ( 62, 80 or 81) . Pres s the

CONFIRM soft key to continue to the SRS

Application Menu.

NOTE:

There are different control modules for SRS

depending on the system and system configuration.

Module types 62 and 80 are used on vehicles with;

pre-tensioners only (2 loops), pre-tensioners and

driver’s air bag only (3 loops) or pr e-tensioners and

driver’s and passenger’s air bags (4 loops).

Module type 81 is used on vehicles with pre-

tensioners, driver’s, front passenger’s and side air

bags (6 loops).

Always refer to the latest Holden spare parts

microfiche / Part finder CD for the correct part

number information.

Figure 12M-68

APPLICATION MENU

The following functions will now be available:

F0: Normal Mode

F1: Diagnostic Trouble Codes

F2: Data Display

F3: Snapshot

Figure 12M-69

F0: NORMAL MODE

In the ‘F0: Norm al Mode’, inform ation that the SDM

is communicating to other control modules, via the

serial data line, is displayed.

For example: As displayed opposite, the SRS

warning lamp status is O N. This m eans the SDM is

communicating with the instruments requesting the

SRS warning lamp to be displayed.

NOTE:

If SRS Module 6.2 is displayed, reference should

be made to the diagnostic procedures detailed in

Section 12M SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

SYSTEM (VERSION 6.2) in this Service

Information CD. Figure 12M-70

F1: DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES

If ‘F1: Diagnostic Trouble Codes’ is selected, a

selection list is displayed which contains:

F0: Read DTC Information - If this mode is

selected, a listing of all (if any) DTCs that have

been set by the SDM will be displayed. Inform ation

displayed with the DTC number/s that have been

set is; a short description of what the DTC is and

whether it is a current (fault present) or history

(stored, but not necessarily on this ignition cycle)

DTC.

NOTE:

If any DTCs are set, reference should be made to

the relevant diagnostic charts in this section.

F1: Clear DTC Information - DTCs can be cleared

in this mode by simply selecting F1: CLEAR DTC

INFORMATION, pressing the ENTER button on

TECH 2 and confirming the action as instructed by

TECH 2.

If a DTC condition is present, TECH 2 will be

unable to clear the DT C and will display “Clear DTC

Information Failed”.

The following table sets out all the possible

diagnostic trouble codes as indicated by TECH 2.

Figure 12M-71

DTC SRS CODE DESCRIPTIONS (For 8.0 and 8.1systems only)

17 Driver air bag circuit short to battery

18 Driver air bag circuit short to earth

19 Driver air bag circuit capacitance too high

20 Driver air bag circuit capacitance too low

21 Driver air bag circuit resistance too high

22 Driver air bag circuit resistance too low

247 Driver’s air bag Circuit Power Stage Error

(Displayed as a History DTC only)

33 Passenger air bag circuit short to battery

34 Passenger air bag circuit short to earth

35 Passenger air bag circuit capacitance too high

36 Passenger air bag circuit capacitance too low

37 Passenger air bag circuit resistance too high

38 Passenger air bag circuit resistance too low

247 Passenger air bag Circuit Power Stage Error

(Displayed as a History DTC only)

49 Left hand belt pre-tensioner circuit short to battery

50 Left hand belt pre-tensioner circuit short to earth

51 Left hand belt pre-tensioner circuit capacitance too high

52 Left hand belt pre-tensioner circuit capacitance too low

53 Left hand belt pre-tensioner circuit resistance too high

54 Left hand belt pre-tensioner circuit resistance too low

247 Left Hand Belt Tensioner Circuit Power Stage Error

(Displayed as a History DTC only)

65 Right hand belt pre-tensioner circuit short to battery

DTC SRS CODE DESCRIPTIONS (For 8.0 and 8.1systems only) cont.

66 Right hand belt pre-tensioner circuit short to earth

67 Right hand belt pre-tensioner circuit capacitance too high

68 Right hand belt pre-tensioner circuit capacitance too low

69 Right hand belt pre-tensioner circuit resistance too high

70 Right hand belt pre-tensioner circuit resistance too low

247 Right Hand Belt Tensioner Circuit Power Stage Error

(Displayed as a History DTC only)

81 Left hand side air bag circuit short to battery

82 Left hand side air bag circuit short to earth

83 Left hand side air bag circuit capacitance too high

84 Left hand side air bag circuit capacitance too low

85 Left hand side air bag circuit resistance too high

86 Left hand side air bag circuit resistance too low

247 Left Hand Side impact air bag Circuit Circuit Power Stage Error

(Displayed as a History DTC only)

97 Right hand side air bag circuit short to battery

98 Right hand side air bag circuit short to earth

99 Right hand side air bag circuit capacitance too high

100 Right hand side air bag circuit capacitance too low

101 Right hand side air bag circuit resistance too high

102 Right hand side air bag circuit resistance too low

247 Right Hand Side impact air bag Circuit Circuit Power Stage Error

(Displayed as a History DTC only)

129 Left peripheral acceleration sensor line fault

130 Right peripheral acceleration sensor line fault

131 Left peripheral acceleration sensor communication fault

132 Right peripheral acceleration sensor communication fault

133 Left peripheral acceleration sensor identification fault

134 Right peripheral acceleration sensor identification fault

135 Left peripheral acceleration sensor hardware fault

136 Right peripheral acceleration sensor hardware fault

161 Configuration mismatch (to instrument)(Displayed as a History DTC only)

163 SDM internal fault (Displayed as a History DTC only)

F2: Data Display

In this test m ode, TECH 2 dis plays the status of inputs

and outputs of the SRS.

The following table lists each item contained in the

data stream together with a brief description of its

meaning.

NOTE:

Depending on the system / system configuration it is

possible that some data list parameters may not

appear in the data stream / screen display. In that

case, these data list parameters are not applicable for

this system / system configuration.

The last three columns of the following table identify

whether any of the data list parameters will be

displayed for that particular system.

2 = 2 loop system; pre-tensioners only.

3 = 3 loop system; pre-tensioners and

driver’s air bag only.

4 = 4 loop system; pre-tensioners and

driver’s and passenger’s air bags.

6 = 6 loop system; pre-tensioners and

driver’s, passenger’s and side air bags.

A = Data parameter display ed for this system.

N/A = Data is not applicable and thus not

displayed for this system.

DATA STREAM /

SCREEN DISPLAY DESCRIPTION 2 3 4 6

Battery Voltage Displays current battery voltage (approximately 12 volts). A A A A

Driver Air Bag Loop

Resistance Displays the resistance in the driver’s air bag circuit. The resistance

should be approximately 2 ohms. If resistance of this circuit is less

than 1 ohm or greater than 8.4 ohms, a DTC will be set. (ohms)

N/A A A A

Driver Air Bag Loop

Capacitance Displays capacitance in the driver’s air bag circuit. The capacitance

should be approximately 470 nF. If capacitance reading is outside ±

17% of this specification for more than 3 seconds, a DTC will be set.

(nF)

N/A A A A

Passenger Air Bag Loop

Resistance Displays resistance in the passenger’s air bag circuit. The resistance

should be approximately 2 ohms. If resistance of this circuit is less

than 0.6 ohm or greater than 8.4 ohms, a DTC will be set. (ohms)

N/A N/A A A

Passenger Air Bag Loop

Capacitance Displays capacitance in the passenger’s air bag circuit. The

capacitance should be approximately 470 nF. If capacitance reading

is outside ± 17% of this specification for more than 3 seconds, a DTC

will be set. (nF)

N/A N/A A A

Left Hand Pre-tensioner

Loop Resistance Displays resistance in the left hand pre-tensioner circuit. The

resistance should be approximately 2 ohms. If resistance of this

circuit is less than 0.6 ohm or greater than 8.4 ohms, a DTC will be

set. (ohms)

A A A A

Left Hand Pre-tensioner

Loop Capacitance Displays capacitance in the left hand pre-tensioner circuit. The

capacitance should be approximately 470 nF. If capacitance reading

is outside ± 17% of this specification for more than 3 seconds, a DTC

will be set. (nF)

A A A A

Right Hand Pre-tensioner

Loop Resistance Displays resistance in the right hand pre-tensioner circuit. The

resistance should be approximately 2 ohms. If resistance of this

circuit is less than 0.6 ohm or greater than 8.4 ohms, a DTC will be

set. (ohms)

A A A A

Right Hand Pre-tensioner

Loop Capacitance Displays capacitance in the right hand pre-tensioner circuit. The

capacitance should be approximately 470 nF. If capacitance reading

is outside ± 17% of this specification for more than 3 seconds, a DTC

will be set. (nF)

A A A A

Left Hand Side Air Bag

Loop Resistance Displays resistance in the left hand side air bag circuit. The

resistance should be approximately 2 ohms. If resistance of this

circuit is less than 0.6 ohm or greater than 8.4 ohms, a DTC will be

set. (ohms)

N/A N/A N/A A

Left Hand Side Air Bag

Loop Capacitance Displays capacitance in the left hand side air bag circuit. The

capacitance should be approximately 470 nF. If capacitance reading

is outside ± 17% of this specification for more than 3 seconds, a DTC

will be set. (nF)

N/A N/A N/A A

Right Hand Side Air Bag

Loop Resistance Displays resistance in the right hand side air bag circuit. The

resistance should be approximately 2 ohms. If resistance of this

circuit is less than 0.6 ohm or greater than 8.4 ohms, a DTC will be

set. (ohms)

N/A N/A N/A A

DATA STREAM /

SCREEN DISPLAY DESCRIPTION 2 3 4 6

Right Hand Side Air Bag

Loop Capacitance Displays capacitance in the right hand side air bag circuit. The

capacitance should be approximately 470 nF. If capacitance reading

is outside ± 17% of this specification for more than 3 seconds, a DTC

will be set. (nF)

N/A N/A N/A A

Driver Air Bag Loop Display indicates whether the SDM has been programmed for the

driver’s air bag loop circuit (enabled / disabled). N/A A A A

Driver’s air bag Circuit

Power Stage Error 1. Displays capacitance in the driver’s air bag circuit. The

capacitance should be approximately 470 nF.

• If the capacitance reading is less than 390.1 nF for less than 500

milliseconds during a initial ignition/key on cycle, a DTC 247

history code will be set.

2. Displays the resistance in the driver’s air bag circuit. The

resistance should be approximately two ohms.

• If resistance of this circuit is less than one ohm for less than 500

milliseconds during a initial ignition/key on cycle, a DTC 247

history code will be set.

N/A A A A

Passenger Air Bag Loop Display indicates whether the SDM has been programmed for the

passenger’s air bag loop circuit (enabled / disabled). N/A N/A A A

Passenger air bag Circuit

Power Stage Error 1. Displays capacitance in the Passenger air bag circuit. The

capacitance should be approximately 470 nF.

• If the capacitance reading is less than 390.1 nF for less than 500

milliseconds during a initial ignition/key on cycle, a DTC 247

history code will be set.

2. Displays the resistance in the Passenger air bag circuit. The

resistance should be approximately two ohms.

• If resistance of this circuit is less than 0.6 ohm for less than 500

milliseconds during a initial ignition/key on cycle, a DTC 247

history code will be set.

N/A N/A A A

Left Hand Pre-tensioner

Loop Display indicates whether the SDM has been programmed for the left

hand pre-tensioner loop circuit (enabled / disabled). A A A A

Left Hand Pre-tensioner

Circuit Power Stage Error 1. Displays capacitance in the Left Hand Pre-tensioner circuit. The

capacitance should be approximately 470 nF.

• If the capacitance reading is less than 390.1 nF for less than 500

milliseconds during a initial ignition/key on cycle, a DTC 247

history code will be set.

2. Displays the resistance in the Left Hand Pre-tensioner circuit.

The resistance should be approximately two ohms.

• If resistance of this circuit is less than 0.6 ohm for less than 500

milliseconds during a initial ignition/key on cycle, a DTC 247

history code will be set.

A A A A

Right Hand Pre-tensioner

Loop Display indicates whether the SDM has been programmed for the

right hand pre-tensioner loop circuit (enabled / disabled). A A A A

Right Hand Pre-tensioner

Circuit Power Stage Error 1. Displays capacitance in the Right Hand Pre-tensioner circuit.

The capacitance should be approximately 470 nF.

• If the capacitance reading is less than 390.1 nF for less than 500

milliseconds during a initial ignition/key on cycle, a DTC 247

history code will be set.

2. Displays the resistance in the Right Hand Pre-tensioner circuit.

The resistance should be approximately two ohms.

• If resistance of this circuit is less than 0.6 ohm for less than 500

milliseconds during a initial ignition/key on cycle, a DTC 247

history code will be set.

A A A A

Left Hand Side Air Bag

Loop Display indicates whether the SDM has been programmed for the left

hand side air bag loop circuit (enabled / disabled). N/A N/A N/A A

DATA STREAM /

SCREEN DISPLAY DESCRIPTION 2 3 4 6

Left Hand Side impact air

bag Circuit Power Stage

Error

1. Displays capacitance in the Left Hand Side impact air bag

circuit. The capacitance should be approximately 470 nF.

• If the capacitance reading is less than 390.1 nF for less than 500

milliseconds during a initial ignition/key on cycle, a DTC 247

history code will be set.

2. Displays the resistance in the Left Hand Side impact air bag

circuit. The resistance should be approximately two ohms.

• If resistance of this circuit is less than 0.6 ohm for less than 500

milliseconds during a initial ignition/key on cycle, a DTC 247

history code will be set.

N/A N/A N/A A

Right Hand Side Air Bag

Loop Display indicates whether the SDM has been programmed for the

right hand side air bag loop circuit (enabled / disabled). N/A N/A N/A A

Right Hand Side impact air

bag Circuit Power Stage

Error

1. Displays capacitance in the Right Hand Side impact air bag

circuit. The capacitance should be approximately 470 nF.

• If the capacitance reading is less than 390.1 nF for less than 500

milliseconds during a initial ignition/key on cycle, a DTC 247

history code will be set.

2. Displays the resistance in the Right Hand Side impact air bag

circuit. The resistance should be approximately two ohms.

• If resistance of this circuit is less than 0.6 ohm for less than 500

milliseconds during a initial ignition/key on cycle, a DTC 247

history code will be set.

N/A N/A N/A A

SRS Lamp Displays the current state of the SDM’s internal SRS warning lamp

driver. (on / off) A A A A

Lamp Check Display indicates the status of the SRS warning lamp during the lamp

check (first 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on). (on / off) A A A A

Battery Voltage (after 3

sec) Displays the vehicle system input voltage to the SDM. If voltage is

below 8 volts or above 21.2 volts for more than 3 seconds, the SRS

warning lamp is switched on. (<8 Volts / okay / >21.2 Volts)

A A A A

Energy Reserve Display indicates status of the energy reserve. If the battery voltage

falls below 7.5 volts, the energy reserve will be switched on. (on / off) A A A A

Serial Data From

Instrument Display indicates whether the instrument configuration of the SRS is

correct. The instruments must be programmed for the SRS

configuration of the vehicle; pre-tensioners only, pre-tensioners and

drivers air bag, pre-tensioners and drivers and passengers air bag,

or pre-tensioners, drivers, passengers and side air bag. (yes / no)

A A A A

BCM Poll Display indicates whether the SDM is receiving a request (a poll via

the serial data line) from the BCM for its status of deployment and

malfunction data. (Received / Not Received)

A A A A

Left Hand Peripheral

Acceleration Sensor

Communication

Display indicates whether the SDM is receiving data from the left

hand peripheral acceleration sensor. If the SDM does not receive

data, a DTC will be set. (Received / Not Received)

N/A N/A N/A A

Right Hand Peripheral

Acceleration Sensor

Communication

Display indicates whether the SDM is receiving data from the right

hand peripheral acceleration sensor. If the SDM does not receive

data, a DTC will be set. (Received / Not Received)

N/A N/A N/A A

Module has deployed Display indicates whether the SDM has deployed any SRS

components. (yes/no) A A A A

Mode F3: Snapshot

In the “F3: Snapshot” mode, TECH 2 enables the user to capture data before and after a forced manual

trigger.

3.6 DIAGNOSTIC CHARTS

INTRODUCTION

The f ollowing diagnostic char ts are des igned to provide fas t and ef ficient fault location of the SRS for vehic les f itted

with an 8.0 or 8.1 SDM. The diagnostic charts contain: a ‘diagnostic chart’, pertinent information, circuit diagrams,

and where necessary, the steps are explained by the corresponding numbered paragraphs.

If a VT Series Model is fitted with a 6.2 SDM, reference should be m ade to the diagnostic procedures detailed in

Section 12M SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (VERSION 6.2) in this Service Information CD.

If an 8.0 SDM is f itted to a VT Series Model that was originally equipped with a 6.2 SDM, the diagnostic proc edures

detailed in this Section are to be used. However, if the vehicle contains a SRS wiring harness that is incorporated

with the main wiring harness (in lieu of being incorporated with the body wiring harness) reference should also be

made to the applicable wiring diagrams for that Model, refer to SRS wiring diagrams in

Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS of this Service Information CD. For additional information, including vehicle

break points, refer to 1.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS, WIRING HARNESS in this Section.

Figure 12M-72 illustrates the terminal layout of the various connectors used in the 8.0 and 8.1 system. This

illustration should be used in conj unction with the diagnostic char t c irc uit diagrams when chec k ing c irc uit f aults if the

connector diagram is not included in the chart.

When carrying out wiring checks as directed to by the diagnos tic char ts , rather than probe ter minals and c onnec tors

with incorrect sized multimeter connections, use the adaptors contained in connector test adaptor kit KM-609 and

test lead set KM-609-20. This will prevent any possibility of spreading or damaging wiring harness terminals and

later on causing a system intermittent failure.

Figure 12M-73 illust rates the corr ect use and installation of the various SRS diagnos tic tools (SD28280B & AU485)

and test lead set (KM-609-20).

IMPORTANT:

UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES IS

12 VOLTS TO BE APPLIED TO THE DUMMY LOAD; SD28280B OR AU485, AS THIS WILL DAMAGE THE

INTERNAL RESISTOR IN THE LOAD, RENDERING THE DUMMY LOAD USELESS FOR ANY FURTHER

DIAGNOSTIC WORK.

ENSURE THAT AT THE COMPLETION OF ANY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE, ALL DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS ARE

REMOVED AND ALL SRS COMPONENTS ARE CORRECTLY RECONNECTED.

Techline

Figure 12M-72

Figure 12M-73

CHART A - DIAGNOSTIC CIRCUIT CHECK

Figure 12M-74

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

When investigating any complaint of an SRS problem or malfunction, always begin diagnosis with the following

diagnostic circuit check. This check is a preliminary procedure that checks to ensure the SDM is communicating on

the serial data line as well as helping to identify a problem or malfunction and directing the reader to the appropriate

diagnostic chart in this Section.

With TECH 2 connected to the DLC and the ignition switched on, TECH 2 should display serial data

communication. If TECH 2 does not display serial data, the serial data circuit maybe open of shorted.

There are several other control modules that are connected to the serial data line (PCM, BCM, ABS/ETC, ECC,

instruments and SDM). ANY one of these control modules could cause a fault on the serial data line. This fault

could result in TECH 2 not being able to display serial data.

TEST DESCRIPTION:

The following numbers refer to step numbers in diagnostic chart ‘A’

1-2. This test is a functional check of the SRS warning lamp during a system self check.

3. Checks to see if TECH 2 can communicate with the SDM.

4. Uses TECH 2 to check for DTCs.

5. If TECH 2 is unable to communicate with the BCM and PCM, there is a fault (short to earth) in the serial data

communication circuit (circuits 1220 or 1221).

6. Checks fuse F26 and circuit 739 for short to earth.

7. Checks for power to SDM.

8. Checks continuity of earth circuit 305.

9. Checks earth connection at SDM.

10. Checks for continuity in circuit 1220 between SDM and BCM to determine if SDM is faulty.

11. Checks if fault is with BCM or open in circuit 1220 between BCM and SDM.

NOTES ON DIAGNOSTIC CHART:

1. Refer to 3.4 TECH 2 DIAGNOSTICS in this Section for connecting and using TECH 2.

2. Refer to Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS in this Service Information CD for procedures on checking wiring

faults.

3. To ensure none of the other control modules on the serial data circuit are causing this voltage problem, unplug

each control module, one at a time, to isolate the short to voltage.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. ∙Turn ignition on while

monitoring the SRS

warning lamp in the

instrument cluster.

∙Does the SRS warning

lamp illuminate?

Go to Step 2. Go to CHART B -

‘SRS’ WARNING

LAMP

INOPERATIVE, in

this Section.

2. ∙After five seconds of

the ignition being

switched on, does the

SRS warning lamp

turn off and remain

off?

Fault not present. Go to Step 3

3. ∙Connect TECH 2 to

DLC (refer to NOTE 1

above).

∙Select Body / SRS /

Turn ignition ON.

∙Does TECH 2 display

System Identification

(ie. SDM part

number)?

Go to Step 4. Go to Step 5.

4. ∙With TECH 2

connected, select

Body / SRS /

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Read DTC

Information.

∙Are there any DTCs

set?

Check and repair

fault causing DTC

to set, refer to

relevant

diagnostic chart in

this Section.

Go to CHART C

‘SRS’ WARNING

LAMP

ILLUMINATED

(NO DTC’S

STORED), in this

Section.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

5. ∙With TECH 2

connected and ignition

on, select Body / DTC

Check / F0: DTC

Check and press the

‘Confirm’ soft key as

instructed.

∙Can TECH 2

communicate with the

BCM and PCM of the

vehicle (if NO DATA is

displayed next to a

control module, then

there is no

communication

between TECH 2 and

that particular control

module)?

Go to Step 6. Go to BCM

diagnostics in

Section

12J-1 LOW

SERIES BCM or

12J-2 HIGH

SERIES BCM.

6. ∙Check SDM fuse F26

in instrument panel

compartment.

∙Is fuse OK?

Go to Step 7. Check and repair

short to earth in

circuit 739.

Replace fuse F26.

Recheck and

verify repair.

7. ∙Turn Ignition off.

∙Disconnect SDM

connector

YB189/YB190.

∙Using SRS test lead

set KM-609-20, turn

ignition ON and

measure voltage

between the SDM

connector

YB189/YB190,

terminal 5, circuit 739

(Pink/Black wire) a nd

earth (refer to NOTE 2

above).

∙Is voltage as

specified?

Battery

+Go to Step 8. Check and repair

open in circuit

739.

Recheck and

verify repair.

8. ∙Turn ignition OFF.

∙With SDM connector

YB189/YB190

disconnected, and

using SRS test lead

set KM-609-20, check

for continuity between

SDM connector

YB189/YB190,

terminal 8, circuit 305

(Black wire) and earth

at location G11(refer

to NOTE 2 above).

∙Does continuity exist?

Go to Step 9. Repair open in

earth circuit 305

as necessary.

Recheck and

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

9. ∙Turn ignition OFF.

∙Check for continuity

between SDM earth

(location G11) and a

known good earth

(refer to NOTE 2

above).

∙Does continuity exist?

Go to Step 10. Repair earth as

necessary.

Recheck and

verify repair.

10. ∙Disconnect SDM

connector

YB189/YB190.

∙Check for continuity in

circuit 1220

(Green/White wire)

between BCM and

SDM by back probing

BCM connector

YB164, terminal 3

(Low Series BCM) or

YB175, terminal 9

(High Series BCM)

and using SRS test

lead set KM-609-20,

probe SDM connector

YB189/YB190,

terminal 9 (refer to

NOTE 2 above).

NOTE: Use SRS test

lead set KM-609-20 to

probe terminals on

connector

YB189/YB190.

∙Does continuity exist?

Replace SDM,

refer to 2.4

SENSING AND

DIAGNOSTIC

MODULE (SDM)

in this Section.

Recheck circuit

to verify repair.

Go to Step 11.

11. ∙Disconnect BCM

connector YB164 (Low

Series BCM) or YB175

(High Series BCM).

∙With SDM connector

YB189/YB190

disconnected, check

for continuity between

BCM connector

YB164, terminal 13 or

YB175, terminal 3 and

SDM connector

YB189/YB190,

terminal 9 (refer to

NOTE 2 above).

NOTE: Use SRS test

lead set KM-609-20 to

probe terminals on

connector

YB189/YB190.

∙Does continuity exist?

Replace BCM,

refer to Section

12J-1 LOW

SERIES BCM

or Section

12J-2 HIGH

SERIES BCM.

Repair open in

circuit 1220

between SDM

and BCM.

Recheck and

verify repair.

WHEN ALL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIRS A RE COMPLETED, ENSURE ALL SRS

COMPONENTS ARE RECONNECTED, CLEAR ALL DTC’S, ENABLE THE SRS AND

VERIFY CORRECT OPERATION

Figure 12M-75

CHART B - SRS WARNING LAMP INOPERATIVE

Figure 12M-76

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

Battery voltage is supplied to the SRS warning lamp with the ignition switch in the IGN or START pos itions through

fuse F13 (located in the passenger compartment f use panel). To illuminate the lamp, the SDM sends a serial data

message to the instrument cluster, requesting the SRS lamp to illuminate.

The SRS warning lamp will be illuminated when:

The ignition is switched on (system wiring and self check ) and if no faults are detec ted, the SRS warning lamp

will be turned off.

If communication is lost between the SDM and the instrument cluster.

If the instrument cluster has not been programmed for the vehicle configuration; 2, 3, 4 or 6 loop system

(configuration problem).

If battery voltage is below 8 volts or above 21.2 volts.

If the SRS is deployed.

If one or m ore current or history Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are detected when the ignition is switched

on.

During an ignition cycle, if the SDM detects a current DTC, the SRS warning lamp will be illuminated.

If the energy reserve in the SDM is switched on (battery voltage less than 7.5 volts).

TEST DESCRIPTION:

The following numbers refer to step numbers in diagnostic chart ‘B’.

1. This test checks for any DTCs that may cause the SRS warning lamp to be inoperative.

2. This test determines if the SDM is faulty by using TECH 2 to drive the warning lamp on.

3. This is a s imple test to determ ine if power is being s upplied to the instrument cluster warning lamps (the SRS

and ABS warning lamps share a common power source).

4. This step determines if the warning lamp bulb or socket is defective.

5. This test checks for a faulty voltage supply to the warning lamp.

NOTES ON DIAGNOSTIC CHART:

1. Refer to 3.4 TECH 2 DIAGNOSTICS in this Section for connecting and using TECH 2.

2. Refer to Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS in this Service Infor mation CD for procedures on check ing wiring

faults.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. ∙Install TECH 2 to

DLC and select Body

/ SRS / Diagnostic

Trouble Codes /

Read DTC

Information (refer to

NOTE 1 above).

∙Are any DTCs set?

Repair conditions

which set DTCs.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 2.

2. ∙With TECH 2 still

connected, select

Body / Instruments /

Miscellaneous Tests

/ Lamps and

command the SRS

warning lamp on

(refer to NOTE 1

above).

∙Does SRS warning

lamp illuminate?

Replace SDM,

refer to 2.7

SENSING &

DIAGNOSTIC

MODULE (SDM)

in this Section.

Recheck circuit to

verify repair.

Go to Step 3.

3. ∙Disconnect TECH 2

from DLC.

∙Turn ignition on

whilst observing ABS

warning lamp.

∙Does ABS warning

lamp illuminate for

approximately 5

seconds then turn

off?

Go to Step 4. Go to Step 5.

4. ∙Remove instrument

cluster, refer to

Section 12C

INSTRUMENTS,

WIPERS/WASHERS

AND HORN.

∙Remove SRS

warning lamp bulb

and socket from

instrument cluster

and check warning

lamp bulb condition.

∙Is bulb and socket

OK?

Replace

instrument

cluster, refer to

12C

INSTRUMENTS,

WIPERS /

WASHERS AND

HORNS.

Replace SRS

warning lamp bulb

and/or socket.

Recheck and

verify repair.

5. ∙Remove instrument

cluster, refer to

Section 12C

INSTRUMENTS,

WIPERS/WASHERS

AND HORN.

∙Switch ignition on

and measure voltage

between connector

YB66, terminal 19,

circuit 44 (Pink/Blue

wire) and earth (refer

to NOTE 2 above).

∙Is voltage as

specified?

Battery

+Fault not present.

Check all system

wiring harness

connectors and

terminals.

Repair as

necessary and

recheck system to

verify repair.

Check fusible link

FJ and fuse F13.

Check wiring

between ignition

switch and

instrument cluster

connector YB66.

Check ignition

switch contacts.

Recheck circuit to

verify repair.

WHEN ALL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIRS A RE COMPLETED, ENSURE ALL SRS

COMPONENTS ARE RECONNECTED, CLEAR ALL DTC’S, ENABLE THE SRS AND

VERIFY CORRECT OPERATION

Figure 12M-77

CHART C - SRS WARNING LAMP ILLUMINATED (NO DTC’S STORED)

Figure 12M-78

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

Battery voltage is supplied to the SRS warning lamp with the ignition switch in the IGN or ST ART pos itions through

fuse F13 (located in the passenger compartment f use panel). To illum inate the lam p, the SDM sends a serial data

message to the instrument cluster (circuit 1220), requesting the SRS lamp to illuminate.

When the ignition is switched on, the SRS warning lam p s hould illuminate f or appr ox imately five seconds to indic ate

the system start up sequence / system wiring and self check. If no system faults are detected, the SRS warning

lamp will be switched off.

If a fault is detected (either during this system check or during the ignition cycle), the SRS warning lamp will either

remain on until the fault is remedied or if a DTC is set, until it is cleared. If a fault is remedied during an ignition

cycle, unless the fault caused a DTC to set, the SRS warning lamp will turn off immediately.

The SRS SDM will send a serial data message to the instrument cluster requesting the lamp be illuminated if it

detects any of the following: If battery voltage is below 8 volts or above 21.2 volts. If the energy reserve in the SDM

is switched on (battery voltage less than 7.5 volts). If the SRS is deployed. If the SDM does not receive a poll from

the BCM. If one or more current or history DTCs are detected when the ignition is switched ON. During an ignition

cycle, if the SDM detects a current DTC, the SRS warning lamp will be illuminated.

The SRS warning lamp will also be illuminated if communication is lost (no serial data) between the SDM and the

instrument cluster.

TEST DESCRIPTION:

The following numbers refer to step numbers in diagnostic chart ‘C’

1. Ensures the Diagnostic Circ uit Check was per form ed which determ ines if ther e is a serial data com m unication

fault and checks if any DTCs are set.

2. Checks if fault is current or intermittent.

3. Using TECH 2, this step check s the voltage supply to the SDM. If battery voltage to the SDM falls below 8 volts

or above 21.2 volts for more than 3 seconds, the SRS warning lamp is switched on.

4. Checks generator output.

5. Determines if the ignition input voltage at the SDM is approximately the same as what the generator output

voltage was during Step 5.

6. Checks continuity of earth circuit 305.

7. Checks earth connection at SDM, location G11.

8. Using TECH 2, this s tep checks if the energy reser ve has been switched on. If the voltage supply to the SDM

falls below 7.5 volts, the energy reserve in the SDM is switched on.

9. Using TECH 2, this step checks if the SDM has deployed the SRS.

10. If TECH 2 is unable to dive the SRS warning lamp on and off, it indicates fault is within the instrument cluster.

NOTES ON DIAGNOSTIC CHART:

1. Refer to 3.4 TECH 2 DIAGNOSTICS in this Section for connecting and using TECH 2.

2. Refer to Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS in this Service Information CD for procedures on checking wiring

faults.

3. Fault Intermittent; connect TECH 2 to DLC, select F3 Body / SRS / DATA DISPLAY and monitor the following

to see if TECH 2 display changes state while wiggling circuit wires and/or road testing vehicle:

BATTERY VOLTAGE (AFTER 3 SEC)

MODULE DEPLOYED

ENERGY RESERVE

CONFIGURATION FROM INSTRUMENTS

BCM POLL

Repair fault as necessary, recheck circuit to verify repair.

4. Refer to Section 6D1-1 CHARGING SYSTEM - V6 ENGINE or Section 6D2-1 CHARGING SYSTEM - V8

ENGINE in this Service Information CD for generator testing details.

5. If the vehicle is involved in an accident in which the SRS was deployed (even if only pre -tensioners where

deployed) refer to 2.6 REPAIRS AND INSPECTIONS REQUIRED AFTER AN ACCIDENT for information on

system components that need to be replaced.

Figure 12M-79

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

∙ Was the Diagnostic

Circuit Check

preformed?

Go to Step 2. Go to CHART A -

DIAGNOSTIC

CIRCUIT CHECK

in this Section.

2. ∙Turn ignition on.

∙Does SRS warning

lamp remain

illuminated after

5 seconds?

Go to Step 3. Fault intermittent,

refer to NOTE 3

above.

3. ∙With TECH 2

connected, and Body /

SRS / Data Display

selected, scroll to

BATTERY VOLTAGE

(AFTER 3 SEC).

∙Does TECH 2 display

battery voltage (after 3

sec) is OKAY?

Go to Step 8. Go to Step 4.

4. ∙Carry out checks of

generator output (refer

to NOTE 4 above).

∙Is generator output

OK?

Go to Step 5. Repair generator

as necessary.

Recheck and

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

5. ∙Disconnect SDM

connector

YB189/YB190.

∙Start engine, turn

headlamps on and

raise engine idle

speed to

approximately 2500

RPM.

∙Using Tool KM-609-

20, check voltage

between SDM wiring

harness connector

YB189/YB190,

terminal 5, circuit 739

and a known good

earth (refer to NOTE 2

above).

∙Is the voltage

measured

approximately the

same as measured

during Step 4

(generator output

tests)?

Go to Step 6. Check and repair

circuit 739 as

necessary.

Recheck and

verify repair.

6. ∙Turn ignition off.

∙With SDM connector

YB189/YB190

disconnected, and

using SRS test lead

set KM-609-20, check

for continuity between

SDM connector

YB189/YB190,

terminal 8, circuit 305

(Black wire) and earth

at location G11(refer

to NOTE 2 above).

∙Does continuity exist?

Go to Step 7. Repair open in

earth circuit 305

as necessary.

Recheck and

verify repair.

7. ∙Check for continuity

between SDM earth

location G11 and a

known good earth

(refer to NOTE 2

above).

∙Does continuity exist?

Replace SDM,

refer to 2.4

SENSING AND

DIAGNOSTIC

MODULE (SDM)

in this Section.

Recheck circuit to

verify repair.

Repair earth as

necessary.

Recheck and

verify repair.

8. ∙With TECH 2

connected, and Body /

SRS / Data Display

selected, scroll to

ENERGY RESERVE.

∙Does TECH 2 display

energy reserve off?

Go to Step 9. Go to Step 4.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

9. ∙With TECH 2

connected, and Body /

SRS / Data Display

selected, scroll to

MODULE HAS

DEPLOYED.

∙Does TECH 2 display

MODULE HAS

DEPLOYED YES?

Replace SDM,

refer to 2.4

SENSING AND

DIAGNOSTIC

MODULE (SDM)

in this Section.

(see NOTE 5

above).

Recheck circuit to

verify repair.

Go to Step 10.

10. ∙With TECH 2

connected, select

Body / Instruments /

Miscellaneous Tests /

Lamps / SRS Lamp.

∙Using the UP and

DOWN keys on TECH

2, drive the SRS

warning lamp on and

off.

∙Is TECH 2 able to

drive the SRS warning

lamp on and off?

Replace SDM,

refer to 2.4

SENSING AND

DIAGNOSTIC

MODULE (SDM)

in this Section.

Recheck circuit to

verify repair.

Replace

instrument cluster

assembly, refer

Section 12C

INSTRUMENTS,

WIPERS /

WASHERS &

HORN.

WHEN ALL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIRS A RE COMPLETED, ENSURE ALL SRS

COMPONENTS ARE RECONNECTED, CLEAR ALL DTC’S, ENABLE THE SRS AND

VERIFY CORRECT OPERATION

DTC 17 - DRIVER AIR BAG CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

Figure 12M-80

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

At ignition on, and on a constant monitoring cycle of every 500 milliseconds during the ignition cycle, the SDM

perform s a system self check . If the SDM detects a resistance to battery supply is less than 5 kohms in either the

positive and/or negative circuit for more than 3 - 5 seconds, a current DTC 17 will set (refer to

3.3 SRS SELF DIAGNOSTICS in this Section for more details).

DTC 17 will set if circuits 347 (driver’s air bag positive side) and/or 348 (driver’s air bag negative side) are shorted to

battery +.

When DTC 17 sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS warning lamp and sets a current DTC 17. Should the fault

conditions detected by the SDM clear during the same ignition cycle, the current code will clear and become a

history DTC 17. The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

If a DTC 17 is set, the SRS warning lam p is illuminated on each ignition cycle, even if the DTC is set as a history

DTC, until the f ault conditions for setting DTC 17 ar e rectified and the DT C (c urrent or history) can then be cleared

from the SDM via TECH 2.

If DTC 17 is set, the SRS, including the driver’s air bag, will still be operational.

TEST DESCRIPTION

The following numbers refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart.

1. Uses TECH 2 to check if DTC 17 is current or history.

2. Checks for intermittent f ault by m onitoring TECH 2 screen display. If screen display changes during a ‘wiggle’

test, a fault with the wiring is at that location.

3. Checks circuits 347 and 348 for a short to battery +.

NOTES ON DIAGNOSTIC CHART

1. For all wiring harness checking procedures, refer to Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS in this Service

Information CD.

2. Refer to 2.8 SRS WIRING REPAIR in Section 12M SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM - (VERSION

6.2), of this Service Information CD before conducting any SRS wiring harness repairs.

3. Resistance cannot be measur ed between the two term inals in connec tor YB147 as the in -built c apacitor block s

measurement. Therefore, a ‘service hole’ is incorporated into the connector for fault tracing. Refer to

1.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS, WIRING HARNESS in this Section for more details on this type of connector.

4. W iring should be checked at the point where TECH 2 screen display changed status. If necessary, split open

harness.

5. If the fault can not be identified, the harness should be replaced.

Figure 12M-81

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. ∙Connect TECH 2 to DLC.

∙Select Body / SRS /

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Read DTC

Information.

∙Is DTC 17 current ?

Go to Step 3. Go to Step 2.

2. ∙Remove steering column

upper and lower cover.

∙With TECH 2 still

connected, select

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Clear DTC

Information and clear all

(if any) DTCs.

∙Select Diagnostic

Trouble Codes / Read

DTC Information, 'wiggle'

SRS wiring harness at all

locations between the

SDM and the clock

spring coil and monitor

TECH 2 screen display.

∙Does TECH 2 screen

display change status

from No Diagnostic

Trouble Codes?

Make repairs as

necessary (refer

NOTE 2 &

4 above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

Fault not present.

Check all system

wiring harness

connectors and

terminals, refer to

NOTE 5 above.

Clear DTC and

recheck system.

3. ∙Disable the SRS, refer to

2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Remove horn bar and

driver's air bag inflator

module, refer to 2.3

HORN BAR AND AIR

BAG MODULE

ASSEMBLY in

Section 12M

SUPPLEMENTAL

RESTRAINT SYSTEM -

(VERSION 6.2).

∙Disconnect SDM wiring

harness connector

YB189/YB190 from the

SDM.

∙Reconnect battery.

∙Using Tool KM-609-20,

check wiring between

SDM wiring harness

connector

YB189/YB190, terminals

10 and 11 and driver's

air bag connector

YB147, circuits 347

(White wire) and 348

(Green wire) for short to

battery + (refer to

NOTES 1 and 3 above).

∙Is all OK?

Replace SDM, refer

to 2.7 SENSING

AND DIAGNOSTIC

MODULE in this

Section.

Recheck circuit to

verify repair.

Make repairs as

necessary (refer to

NOTE 2 above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

WHEN ALL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIRS ARE COMPLETED, ENSURE ALL SRS

COMPONENTS ARE RECONNECTED, CLEAR ALL DTC’S, ENABLE THE SRS AND VERIFY

CORRECT OPERATION

DTC 18 - DRIVER AIR BAG CIRCUIT SHORT TO EARTH

Figure 12M-82

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

At ignition on, and on a constant monitoring cycle of every 500 milliseconds during the ignition cycle, the SDM

performs a s ystem s elf c heck. If the SDM detec ts a r es istanc e to earth of less than 3 k ohms in either the pos itive or

negative inflator circuit for more than 3 - 5 seconds, a current DTC 18 will set (refer to 3.3 SRS SELF

DIAGNOSTICS in this Section for more details).

DTC 18 will set if circuits 347 (driver’s air bag positive side) and/or 348 (driver’s air bag negative side) are shorted to

earth.

When DTC 18 sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS warning lamp and sets a ‘current’ DTC 18. Should the fault

conditions detected by the SDM clear during the same ignition cycle, the current code will clear and become a

history DTC 18. The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

If a DTC 18 is set, the SRS warning lam p is illuminated on each ignition cycle, even if the DTC is set as a history

DTC, until the f ault conditions for setting DTC 18 ar e rectified and the DT C (c urrent or history) can then be cleared

from the SDM via TECH 2.

If DTC 18 is set, the SRS, including the driver’s air bag, will still be operational.

TEST DESCRIPTION

The following numbers refer to Step numbers in the following diagnostic chart.

1. Uses TECH 2 to check if DTC 18 is current or history.

2. TECH 2 in this mode should display approximately 2.0 - 6.4 ohms if the driver's air bag loop circuit is OK.

3. If screen display changes during a wiring 'wiggle' test, a fault with the wiring is at that location.

4. Tool SD28280B is a dum m y load taking the plac e of the horn bar and driver 's air bag inflator m odule. If TECH

2 displays the correct resistance of the dummy load, the system fault is in the horn bar and driver's air bag

inflator module assembly.

5. This test check s the wiring between the SDM wiring harness c onnector YB189 (8.1 SDM) or YB190 (8.0 SDM),

terminal 10 and the horn bar and driver's air bag inflator module connector YB147 for faults.

6. This test check s the wiring between the SDM wiring harness c onnector YB189 (8.1 SDM) or YB190 (8.0 SDM),

terminal 11 and the horn bar and driver's air bag inflator module connector YB147 for faults.

NOTES ON DIAGNOSTIC CHART

1. For all wiring harness checking procedures, refer to Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS in this Service

Information CD.

2. Refer to 2.8 SRS WIRING REPAIR in Section 12M SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM - (VERSION

6.2), of this Service Information CD before conducting any SRS wiring harness repairs.

3. Refer to Section 12N FUSES & WIRING HARNESSES in this Service Information CD f or SRS wiring harnes s

routing.

4. Resistance cannot be measur ed between the two term inals in connec tor YB147 as the in-built c apacitor block s

measurement. Therefore, a ‘service hole’ is incorporated into the connector for fault tracing. Refer to 1.1

SYSTEM COMPONENTS, WIRING HARNESS in this Section for more details on this type of connector.

5. Wiring should be checked at point where TECH 2 screen display changed. If necessary, split open wiring

harness.

6. If the fault cannot be identified, the wiring harness should be replaced.

Figure 12M-83

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. ∙Connect TECH 2 to

DLC and select Body /

SRS / Diagnostic

Trouble Codes / Read

DTC Information.

∙Does TECH 2 display

DTC 18 as a Current

DTC?

Go to Step 2. Go to Step 3.

2. ∙With TECH 2 still

connected, select

Body / SRS / Data

Display and scroll to

DRIVER AIR BAG

LOOP RESISTANCE.

∙Is value displayed on

TECH 2 as specified?

Approx.

2.0 - 6.4

Ohms

Go to Step 3. Go to Step 4.

3. ∙Remove steering

column upper and

lower cover.

∙With TECH 2 still

connected, select

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Clear DTC

Information and clear

all (if any) DTCs.

∙Select Diagnostic

Trouble Codes / Read

DTC Information,

'wiggle' SRS wiring

harness at all locations

between the SDM and

the clock spring coil

and monitor TECH 2

screen display.

∙Does TECH 2 screen

display change status

from No Diagnostic

Trouble Codes?

Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTES 2 & 5

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

Fault not present.

Check all system

wiring harness

connectors, and

terminals, refer to

NOTE 6 above.

Clear DTC and

recheck system.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

4. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Remove horn bar and

driver's air bag inflator

module, refer to 2.3

HORN BAR AND AIR

BAG MODULE

ASSEMBLY in

Section 12M

SUPPLEMENT

RESTRAINT SYSTEM

- VERSION 6.2, in

this Service

Information CD.

∙Connect Tool No.

SD28280B to SRS

wiring harness

connector YB147.

∙Enable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙With TECH 2 still

connected, select

Body / SRS / Data

Display and scroll to

DRIVER AIR BAG

LOOP RESISTANCE.

∙Is value displayed on

TECH 2 as specified?

Approx.

3.0

Ohms

Replace horn bar

and driver air bag

inflator module

assembly, refer to

2.3 HORN BAR

AND AIR BAG

MODULE

ASSEMBLY in

Section 12M,

SUPPLEMENT

RESTRAINT

SYSTEM -

VERSION 6.2, in

this Service

Information CD.

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

Go to Step 5.

5. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect SDM

wiring harness

connector

YB189/YB190 from

the SDM.

∙Remove Tool

SD28280B from

YB147.

∙Using Tool KM-609-

20, check wiring

between SDM wiring

harness connector

YB189/YB190,

terminals 10 and

driver's air bag inflator

module connector

YB147, circuits 347

(White wire) for short

to earth (refer to

NOTE 1 above).

∙Is all OK?

Go to Step 6. Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

6. ∙With system disabled,

SDM wiring harness

connector

YB189/YB190

disconnected and

using Tool KM-609-20,

check wiring between

SDM wiring harness

connector YB189/

YB190, terminal 11

and driver's air bag

inflator module

connector YB147,

circuit 348 (Green

wire) for a short to

earth (refer to NOTES

1 and 4 above).

∙Is all OK?

Replace SDM,

refer to 2.4

SENSING AND

DIAGNOSTIC

MODULE (SDM)

in this Section.

Recheck circuit to

verify repair.

Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

WHEN ALL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIRS A RE COMPLETED, ENSURE ALL SRS

COMPONENTS ARE RECONNECTED, CLEAR ALL DTC’S, ENABLE THE SRS AND

VERIFY CORRECT OPERATION

DTC 19 - DRIVER AIR BAG CIRCUIT CAPACITANCE TOO HIGH

Figure 12M-84

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

At ignition on, and on a constant monitoring cycle of every 500 milliseconds during the ignition cycle, the SDM

performs a system self check.

If the SDM detects the capacitanc e in the driver’s air bag circ uit is too high (greater than 550 nF) f or longer than 3 -

5 seconds, a current DTC 19 will set (refer to 3.3 SRS SELF DIAGNOSTICS in this Section for more details).

DTC 19 will set if the in-built capacitor in the SRS wiring harness connector YB147 is faulty.

When DTC 19 sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS warning lamp and sets a current DTC 19. Should the fault

conditions detected by the SDM clear during the same ignition cycle, the current code will clear and become a

history DTC 19. The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

If a DTC 19 is set, the SRS warning lam p is illuminated on each ignition cycle, even if the DTC is set as a history

DTC, until the f ault conditions for setting DTC 19 ar e rectified and the DT C (c urrent or history) can then be cleared

from the SDM via TECH 2.

ACTION REQUIRED

If DTC 19 is set, the driver’s air bag may not operate and therefore, the clock spring coil assembly must be replaced

(connector YB147 with the in-built capacitor is part of the clockspring coil assembly). Refer to

2.6 CLOCK SPRING COIL in Section 12M SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM - (VERSION 6.2), in this

Service Information CD for the correct procedure on replacing the clock spring coil assembly.

After the c lock spring coil as sembly has been replaced, ensure all SRS c omponents are reconnected, c lear DTCs,

enable the SRS and verify the correct operation of the system (i.e. warning lamp not illum inated after five seconds

of ignition being switched ON).

DTC 20 - DRIVER AIR BAG CIRCUIT CAPACITANCE TOO LOW

Figure 12M-85

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

At ignition on, and on a constant monitoring cycle of every 500 milliseconds during the ignition cycle, the SDM

performs a system self check.

If the SDM detects the capacitance in the driver’s air bag circuit is too low (less than 390 nF) for longer than 3 - 5

seconds, a current DTC 20 will set (refer to 3.3 SRS SELF DIAGNOSTICS in this Section for more details).

DTC 20 will set if the in-built capacitor in the SRS wiring harness connector YB147 is faulty.

When DTC 20 sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS warning lamp and sets a current DTC 20. Should the fault

conditions detected by the SDM clear during the same ignition cycle, the current code will clear and become a

history DTC 20. The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

If a DTC 20 is set, the SRS warning lam p is illuminated on each ignition cycle, even if the DTC is set as a history

DTC, until the f ault conditions for setting DTC 20 ar e rectified and the DT C (c urrent or history) can then be cleared

from the SDM via TECH 2.

ACTION REQUIRED

If DTC 20 is set, the driver’s air bag may not operate and therefore, the clock spring coil assembly must be replaced

(connector YB147 with the in-built capacitor is par t of the c locks pring c oil as se mbly). Refer to 2.6 CLOCK SPRING

COIL in Section 12M SUPPLEMENT AL REST RAINT SYSTEM - (VERSION 6.2) , in this Ser vice Inf orm ation CD f or

the correct procedure on replacing the clock spring coil assembly.

After the clock spring coil assembly has been replaced, ensure that all SRS components are reconnected, clear

DTCs, enable the SRS and verify the correct operation of the system (i.e. warning lamp not illuminated after five

seconds of ignition being switched ON).

DTC 21 - DRIVER AIR BAG CIRCUIT RESISTANCE TOO HIGH

Figure 12M-86

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

At ignition on, and on a constant monitoring cycle of every 500 milliseconds during the ignition cycle, the SDM

performs a system self check.

If the SDM detects a res is tance in the dr iver’s air bag cir cuit that is too high ( greater than 8.4 ohm) f or longer than 3

- 5 seconds, a current DTC 21 will set (refer to 3.3 SRS SELF DIAGNOSTICS in this Section for more details).

DTC 21 will set if circuits 347 or 348, (including the horn bar and air bag assembly and the clock spring coil) are

open circuited.

When DTC 21 sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS warning lamp and sets a current DTC 21. Should the fault

conditions detected by the SDM clear during the same ignition cycle, the current code will clear and become a

history DTC 21. The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

If a DTC 21 is set, the SRS warning lam p is illuminated on each ignition cycle, even if the DTC is set as a history

DTC, until the f ault conditions for setting DTC 21 ar e rectified and the DT C (c urrent or history) can then be cleared

from the SDM via TECH 2.

If DTC 21 is set, dependent on where the fault is, the driver’s air bag may not operate.

TEST DESCRIPTION

The following number refer to Step numbers in the following diagnostic chart.

1. Uses TECH 2 to check if DTC 21 is current or history.

2. Checks for intermittent fault by monitoring TECH 2 screen. If screen display changes during a wiring 'wiggle'

test, a fault with the wiring is at that location.

3. Tool SD28280B is a dummy load taking the place of the driver’s horn bar and air bag assembly. If DTC 21

becomes a history DTC with dummy load connected, the system fault is in the driver’s horn bar and air bag

assembly.

4. Checks if open circuit is in the clock spring coil. If the clock spring coil is disconnected from the system, and

term inals 7 & 8 in connec tor YB149 bridged together, DT C 21 will become a histor y DTC if the c lock spr ing coil

is faulty.

5. Checks circuit 347 for open circuit.

6. Checks circuit 348 for open circuit.

NOTES ON DIAGNOSTIC CHART

1. For all wiring harness checking procedures, refer to Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS in this Service

Information CD.

2. Refer to 2.8 SRS WIRING REPAIR in Section 12M SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM - (VERSION

6.2) in this Service Information CD before conducting any SRS wiring harness repairs.

Figure 12M-87

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. ∙Install TECH 2 to DLC.

∙Select Body / SRS /

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Read DTC

Information.

∙Is DTC 21 current?

Go to Step 3. Go to Step 2.

2. ∙Remove steering

column upper and

lower cover.

∙With TECH 2 still

connected, select

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Clear DTC

Information and clear

all (if any) DTCs.

∙Select Diagnostic

Trouble Codes / Read

DTC Information,

'wiggle' SRS wiring

harness at all locations

between the SDM and

the clock spring coil

while monitoring the

TECH 2 screen

display.

∙Does TECH 2 screen

display change status

from No Diagnostic

Trouble Codes?

Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

Fault not present.

Check all system

wiring harness

connectors, and

terminals.

Clear DTC and

recheck system.

3. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Remove horn bar and

driver's air bag inflator

module, refer to 2.3

HORN BAR AND AIR

BAG MODULE

ASSEMBLY in

Section 12M

SUPPLEMENT

RESTRAINT SYSTEM

- (VERSION 6.2).

∙Connect Tool No.

SD28280B to SRS

wiring harness

connector YB147.

∙Reconnect battery.

∙Connect TECH 2 to

DLC and select Body /

SRS / Diagnostic

Trouble Codes / Read

DTC Information.

∙Is DTC 21 still

current?

Go to Step 4. Replace horn bar

and driver's air

bag inflator

module assembly,

refer to 2.3 HORN

BAR AND AIR

BAG MODULE

ASSEMBLY in

Section 12M

SUPPLEMENT

RESTRAINT

SYSTEM -

(VERSION 6.2).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

4. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect SRS wiring

harness connector

YB149 from clock

spring coil assembly.

∙Reconnect battery.

∙Using a suitable

jumper wire from KM-

609, bridge connector

YB149, terminals 7

and 8 together.

(NOTE: This step may

set a current DTC 22).

∙With TECH 2 still

connected, select

Body / SRS /

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Read DTC

Information.

∙Does DTC 21 become

history?

Replace clock

sprin g coil

assembly, refer to

2.6 CLOCK

SPRING COIL in

Section 12M

SUPPLEMENT

RESTRAINT

SYSTEM -

(VERSION 6.2).

Clear all DTCs

and recheck

system to verify

repair.

Go to Step 5

5. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect SDM

wiring harness

connector

YB189/YB190 from

the SDM.

∙Using Tool KM-609-

20, check wiring

between SDM wiring

harness connector

YB189/YB190,

terminal 10 and clock

spring coil connector

YB149, terminal 7,

circuit 347 (White

wire) for open circuit

(refer to NOTE 1

above).

∙Is all OK?

Go to Step 6. Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

6. ∙With system disabled,

SDM wiring harness

connector YB189/

YB190 disconnected

and using Tool KM-

609-20, check wiring

between SDM wiring

harness connector

YB189/ YB190,

terminal 11 and clock

spring coil connector

YB149, terminal 8,

circuit 348 (Green

wire) for open circuit

(refer to

NOTE 1 above).

∙Is all OK?

Replace SDM,

refer to 2.4

SENSING AND

DIAGNOSTIC

MODULE in this

Section.

Recheck circuit to

verify repair.

Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

WHEN ALL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIRS A RE COMPLETED, ENSURE ALL SRS

COMPONENTS ARE RECONNECTED, CLEAR ALL DTC’S, ENABLE THE SRS AND

VERIFY CORRECT OPERATION

DTC 22 - DRIVER AIR BAG CIRCUIT RESISTANCE TOO LOW

Figure 12M-88

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

At ignition on, and on a constant monitoring cycle of every 500 milliseconds during the ignition cycle, the SDM

performs a system self check.

If the SDM detects a resistance in the driver’s air bag circuit that is too low (less than 1 ohm ) for longer than 3 - 5

seconds, a current DTC 22 will set (refer to 3.3 SRS SELF DIAGNOSTICS in this Section for more details).

DTC 22 will set if circuits 347 or 348, (including the horn bar and air bar assembly and the clock spring coil) are

shorted together.

When DTC 22 sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS warning lamp and sets a current DTC 22. Should the fault

conditions detected by the SDM clear during the same ignition cycle, the current code will clear and become a

history DTC 22. The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

If a DTC 22 is set, the SRS warning lam p is illuminated on each ignition cycle, even if the DTC is set as a history

DTC, until the f ault conditions for setting DTC 22 ar e rectified and the DT C (c urrent or history) can then be cleared

from the SDM via TECH 2.

If DTC 22 is set, dependent on where the fault is, the driver’s air bag may not operate.

TEST DESCRIPTION

The following numbers refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart.

1. Uses TECH 2 to check if DTC 22 is current or history.

2. Checks for intermittent fault by monitoring TECH 2 screen. If screen display changes during a wiring 'wiggle'

test, a fault with the wiring is at that location.

3. Tool SD28280B is a dummy load taking the place of the driver’s horn bar and air bag assembly. If DTC 22

becomes a history DTC with dummy load connected, the system fault is in the driver’s horn bar and air bag

assembly.

4. Checks if short c irc uit is in the c lock spr ing coil. If the c lock spr ing coil is dis c onnected from the system , a DTC

21 (open circuit) will set and DTC 22 will become history. If DTC 21 sets and DTC 22 becomes history, the

clock spring coil is faulty.

5. This test checks the wiring between the SDM harness connector YB189 (8.1 SDM) or YB190 (8.0 SDM) and

SRS connector YB149 for a short circuit.

NOTES ON DIAGNOSTIC CHART

1. For all wiring harness checking procedures, refer to Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS in this Service

Information CD.

2. Refer to 2.8 SRS WIRING REPAIR in Section 12M SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM - (VERSION

6.2) in this Service Information CD before conducting any SRS wiring harness repairs.

Figure 12M-89

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. ∙Install TECH 2 to DLC.

∙Select Body / SRS /

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Read DTC

Information.

∙Is DTC 22 current?

Go to Step 3. Go to Step 2.

2. ∙Remove steering

column upper and

lower cover.

∙With TECH 2 still

connected, select

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Clear DTC

Information and clear

all (if any) DTCs.

∙Select Diagnostic

Trouble Codes / Read

DTC Information,

'wiggle' SRS wiring

harness at all locations

between the SDM and

the clock spring coil

while monitoring the

TECH 2 screen

display.

∙Does TECH 2 screen

display change status

from No Diagnostic

Trouble Codes?

Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

Fault not present.

Check all system

wiring harness

connectors, and

terminals.

Clear DTC and

recheck system.

3. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Remove horn bar and

driver's air bag inflator

module, refer to 2.3

HORN BAR AND AIR

BAG MODULE

ASSEMBLY in

Section 12M

SUPPLEMENTAL

RESTRAINT SYSTEM

- (VERSION 6.2).

∙Connect Tool No.

SD28280B to SRS

wiring harness

connector YB147.

∙Reconnect battery.

∙Connect TECH 2 to

DLC and select Body /

SRS / Diagnostic

Trouble Codes / Read

DTC Information.

∙Is DTC 22 still

current?

Go to Step 4. Replace horn bar

and driver's air

bag inflator

module assembly,

refer to 2.3 HORN

BAR AND AIR

BAG MODULE

ASSEMBLY in

Section 12M

SUPPLEMENTAL

RESTRAINT

SYSTEM -

(VERSION 6.2).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

4. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect SRS wiring

harness connector

YB149 from clock

spring coil assembly.

∙Reconnect battery.

∙With TECH 2 still

connected, select

Body / SRS /

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Read DTC

Information.

∙Is DTC 21 current and

DTC 22 history ?

Replace clock

sprin g coil

assembly, refer to

2.6 CLOCK

SPRING COIL in

Section 12M

SUPPLEMENTAL

RESTRAINT

SYSTEM -

(VERSION 6.2).

Clear all DTCs

and recheck

system to verify

repair.

Go to Step 5

5. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect SDM

wiring harness

connector

YB189/YB190 from

the SDM.

∙With SRS wiring

harness connector

YB149 disconnected,

and using Tool KM-

609-20, check for

continuity between

SDM wiring harness

connector

YB189/YB190,

terminal 10, circuit 347

(White wire) and

terminal 11, circuit 348

(Green wire) (refer to

NOTE 1 above).

∙Does continuity exist?

Repair short in

circuits 347 and

348, between

SDM wiring

harness

connector

YB189/YB190 and

YB149 as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

Replace SDM,

refer to 2.4

SENSING AND

DIAGNOSTIC

MOODULE in this

Section.

Recheck circuit to

verify repair.

WHEN ALL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIRS A RE COMPLETED, ENSURE ALL SRS

COMPONENTS ARE RECONNECTED, CLEAR ALL DTC’S, ENABLE THE SRS AND

VERIFY CORRECT OPERATION

DTC 247 - DRIVER’S AIR BAG CIRCUIT POWER STAGE ERROR

T12M126

YB147

YB149

YB191

YB189

YB190

DRIVER

AIRBAG

INFLATOR

DRIVER

IRBAG INFLATOR (+)

DRIVER

IRBAG INFLATOR (-)

CL OCK SPR ING CO IL

W (347)

G (348)

SDM

Figure 12M-90

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

At ignition on, the SDM perf orms an initial sys tem self check of the SDM power stages. If dur ing this initial

self test the SDM detects a fault with the driver’s air bag power stage a current DTC 247 Driver’s Air Bag

Circuit Power Stage Err or will set. O n c ompletion of the initial s ystem self test the SDM then perf orms a test

of the Driver ’s Air Bag Circuit. If the SDM detects a problem with this circ uit the assoc iated Driver’s Air Bag

Circuit DTC will be set and the DTC 247 Driver’s Air Bag Circuit Power Stage Error will become a history

DTC.

DTC 247 Driver’s Air Bag Circuit Power Stage Error will set if a fault occurs in the driver’s air bag circuit,

clock s pr ing coil as s embly with the in-built capac itor connec tor YB147, connector YB149, connector YB191,

the SRS wiring harness, connector YB189/YB190 or SDM.

When a history DTC 247 Driver’s Air Bag Circuit Power Stage Error sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS

warning lamp. Should the fault conditions detected by the SDM clear during the same ignition cycle the

code will remain a history DTC 247 Driver’s Air Bag Circuit Power Stage Error for all ignition cycles until

cleared. The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

When a DTC 247 Driver’s Air Bag Circuit Power Stage Error sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS warning

lamp for the remainder of the ignition cycle. Should the fault conditions detected by the SDM clear during

the same ignition cycle the code will remain a history DTC 247 Driver’s Air Bag Circuit Power Stage Error

for all ignition c yc les until cleared. The SR S warning lam p will also rem ain illuminated until the histor y DT C

247 Driver’s Air Bag Circuit Power Stage Error is cleared.

If a DTC 247 Driver’s Air Bag Circuit Power Stage is set, dependent on where the fault is, the driver’s air

bag may not operate.

ACTION REQUIRED

If DT C 247 Dr iver’s Air Bag Circ uit Power Stage Err or and any other DTC is s et then the diagnostic s f or the

other DTC s hould be carried out f irst. For exam ple if a DTC 247 Driver’s Air Bag Circuit Power Stage Error

and a DTC 21 Driver’s Air Bag Circuit Resistance High are set, the diagnostics for a DTC 21 Driver’s Air

Bag Circuit Resistance High should be carried out first.

If only a DTC 247 Driver’s Air Bag Circuit Power Stage Error is set then the SDM should be replaced.

NOTE: An intermittent in the driver’s air bag circuit may cause a DTC 247 Driver’s Air Bag Circuit Power

Stage Error to set.

After the f ault has been r ec tif ied, ens ure that all SRS c omponents ar e rec onnec ted, c lear DT Cs , enable the

SRS and verify the correct operation of the system (i.e. warning lamp not illuminated after five seconds of

ignition being switched ON).

TEST DESCRIPTION

The following numbers refer to Step numbers in the following diagnostic chart.

1. Uses T ECH 2 to check if a DTC 247 Driver’s Air Bag Circuit Power Stage Error is history code, and if

any other driver’s air bag circuit current or history DTCs are set. If any other DTCs are set refer to these

DTCs first.

2. Checks for intermittent fault by monitoring TECH 2 screen during ignition on cycle. If screen display

changes during a wiring 'wiggle' test, a fault with the wiring is at that location.

3. If no other DTCs are set and there are no intermittents in the driver’s air bag circuit then the SDM

should be replaced.

NOTES ON DIAGNOSTIC CHART

1. For all wiring harness checking procedures, refer to VT Series 1 Service Information, WIRING

DIAGRAMS, SECTION 12P.

2. Refer to VT Series 1 Service Inf ormation Section 12M, SRS VERSION 6.2, 2.8 SRS WIRING REPAIR

before conducting any SRS wiring harness repairs.

T12M170

YB189

8.1 SDM

WIRING HARNESS

CONNECTOR

BR/B (393)

50 25

BL U/B ( 3 51) R/B (3 52)

BR/W ( 353)

Y/R (354)

P/B (739)

B (305)

B (3 05)

G/W ( 122 0 )

W (3 4 7 )

G (3 48 )

Y/B (349)

GY / B (350)

Y/G (385)

BR/G (386)

Y/W (387)

BR/W ( 388)

Y/BLU (392)

GY / W ( 407)

LBLU (408)

BLU/B (351)

R/B (352)

BR/W (353)

Y/R (354)

P/B (73 9 )

G/W (1220)

W (3 4 7)

G (348)

Y/B (34 9 )

GY/ B (350)

YB190

8.0 SDM WIRING

HARNESS

CONNECTOR

+VE-VE

G (34 8) W (347 )

CAP

ALSO -VE

YB147

DRIVER'S AIRBAG

CONNECTOR

B/Y (701)

B/Y (28)

G (348)

W(347)

BR (515)

B/G (151 )

YB149

CLOCK SP RING

CONNECTOR

Figure 12M-91

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. • Install TECH 2 to DLC.

• Select Body / SRS / Diagnostic Trouble Codes /

Read DTC Information.

• Is a DTC 247 Driver’s Air Bag Circuit Power Stage

Error a history DTC, and are any other driver’s air

bag circuit DTCs set?

Go to other

driver’s air bag

circuit DTC

diagnostic chart

in this Section.

Go to Step 2.

2. • Remove steering column upper and lower cover.

• With TECH 2 still connected, select Diagnostic

Trouble Codes / Clear DTC Information and clear all

DTCs.

• Select Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC

Information, 'wiggle' SRS wiring harness at all

locations between the SDM and the clock spring coil

while monitoring the TECH 2 screen display.

• Jack up the front of the vehicle and turn the steering

wheel from lock to lock while monitoring the TECH 2

screen display.

• Does TECH 2 screen display change status from

No Diagnostic Trouble Codes?

Go to applicable

DTC chart in this

Section.

Go to step 3.

3 • Replace SDM, refer to VT Series 1 Service

Inform ation Section 12M, SRS VERSIO N 8.0 &

8.1, 2.4 SENSING AND DIAGNOSTIC

MODULE (SDM). Recheck circuit to verify

repair.

WHEN ALL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIRS ARE COMPLETED, ENSURE ALL SRS COMPONENTS ARE

RECONNECTED, CLEAR ALL DTC’S, ENABLE THE SRS AND VERIFY CORRECT OPERATION

DTC 33 - PASSENGER AIR BAG CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

Figure 12M-92

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

At ignition on, and on a constant monitoring cycle of every 500 milliseconds during the ignition cycle, the SDM

performs a system self check.

If the SDM detects a resistance to battery supply is less than 5 k ohms in either the positive and/or negative circuit

for m ore than 3 - 5 seconds, a current DTC 33 will set (refer to 3.3 SRS SELF DIAGNOSTICS in this Section for

more details).

DTC 33 will set if circ uits 349 (passenger ’s air bag pos itive side) and/or 350 (passenger ’s air bag negative s ide) are

shorted to battery +.

When DTC 33 sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS warning lamp and sets a current DTC 33. Should the fault

conditions detected by the SDM clear during the same ignition cycle, the current code will clear and become a

history DTC 33. The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

If a DTC 33 is set, the SRS warning lam p is illuminated on each ignition cycle, even if the DTC is set as a history

DTC, until the f ault conditions for setting DTC 33 ar e rectified and the DT C (c urrent or history) can then be cleared

from the SDM via TECH 2.

If DTC 33 is set, the SRS, including the passenger’s air bag, will still be operational.

TEST DESCRIPTION

The following number refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart:

1. Uses TECH 2 to check if DTC 33 is current or history.

2. Checks for intermittent f ault by m onitoring TECH 2 screen display. If screen display changes during a ‘wiggle’

test, a fault with the wiring is at that location.

3. Checks circuit 349 and 350 for a short to battery +.

NOTES ON DIAGNOSTIC CHART

1. For all wiring harness checking procedures, refer to Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS in this Service

Information CD.

2. Refer to 2.8 SRS WIRING REPAIR in Section 12M SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM - (VERSION

6.2), in this Service Information CD before conducting any SRS wiring harness repairs.

3. Resistance cannot be measured between the two terminals in connector YB208, as the in-built capacitor

blocks measurement. Therefore, a ‘service hole’ is incorporated into the connector for fault tracing. Refer to

1.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS, WIRING HARNESS in this Section for more details on this type of connector.

4. W iring should be checked at point where TECH 2 screen display changed status. If necessary, split open the

harness.

5. If the fault can not be identified, the harness should be replaced.

Figure 12M-93

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. ∙Connect TECH 2 to DLC.

∙Select Body / SRS /

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Read DTC

Information.

∙Is DTC 33 current ?

Go to Step 3. Go to Step 2.

2. ∙Remove instrument

panel compartment to

gain access to

passenger’s air bag,

refer to Section 1A3

INSTRUMENT PANEL

AND CONSOLE.

∙With TECH 2 still

connected, select

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Clear DTC

Information and clear all

(if any) DTCs.

∙Select Diagnostic

Trouble Codes / Read

DTC Information, 'wiggle'

SRS wiring harness at all

locations between the

SDM and the

passenger’s air bag

wiring harness connector

YB208, while monitoring

TECH 2 screen display.

∙Does TECH 2 screen

display change status

from No Diagnostic

Trouble Codes?

Make repairs as

necessary (refer to

NOTES 2 & 4

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

Fault not present.

Check all system

wiring harness

connectors, and

terminals (refer to

NOTE 5 above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system.

3. ∙Disable the SRS, refer to

2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE.

∙Disconnect passenger’s

air bag inflator module

wiring harness connector

YB208.

∙Disconnect SDM wiring

harness connector

YB189/YB190 from the

SDM.

∙Reconnect battery.

∙Using Tool KM-609-20,

check wiring between

SDM wiring harness

connector

YB189/YB190, terminals

13 and 14 and

passenger’s air bag

connector YB208,

circuits 349

(Yellow/Black wire) and

350 (Grey/Black wire) for

short to battery + (refer

to NOTES 1 and 3

above).

∙Is all OK?

Replace SDM, refer

to 2.4 SENSING

AND DIAGNOSTIC

MODULE (SDM) in

this section.

Recheck circuit and

verify repair.

Make repairs as

necessary (refer to

NOTE 2 above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

WHEN ALL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIRS ARE COMPLETED, ENSURE ALL SRS

COMPONENTS ARE RECONNECTED, CLEAR ALL DTC’S, ENABLE THE SRS AND VERIFY

CORRECT OPERATION

DTC 34 - PASSENGER AIR BAG CIRCUIT SHORT TO EARTH

Figure 12M-94

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

At ignition on, and on a constant monitoring cycle of every 500 milliseconds during the ignition cycle, the SDM

performs a s ystem s elf c heck. If the SDM detec ts a r es istanc e to earth of less than 3 k ohms in either the pos itive or

negative inflator circuit for more than 3 - 5 seconds, a current DTC 34 will set (refer to

3.3 SRS SELF DIAGNOSTICS in this Section for more details).

DTC 34 will set if circ uits 349 (passenger ’s air bag pos itive side) and/or 350 (passenger ’s air bag negative s ide) are

shorted to earth.

When DTC 34 sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS warning lamp and sets a current DTC 34. Should the fault

conditions detected by the SDM clear during the same ignition cycle, the current code will clear and become a

history DTC 34. The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

If a DTC 34 is set, the SRS warning lam p is illuminated on each ignition cycle, even if the DTC is set as a history

DTC, until the f ault conditions for setting DTC 34 ar e rectified and the DT C (c urrent or history) can then be cleared

from the SDM via TECH 2.

If DTC 34 is set, the SRS, including the passenger’s air bag, will still be operational.

TEST DESCRIPTION

The following number refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart:

1. Uses TECH 2 to check if DTC 34 is current or history.

2. TECH 2 in this mode should display approximately 1.6 - 6.4 ohms if the passenger’s air bag loop circuit is OK.

3. If screen display changes during a wiring 'wiggle' test, a fault with the wiring is at that location.

4. Tool SD28280B is a dummy load taking the place of the passenger’s air bag inflator module. If TECH 2

displays the correct resistance of the dummy load, the system fault is in the passenger's air bag inflator module

assembly.

5. This test check s the wiring between the SDM wiring harness c onnector YB189 (8.1 SDM) or YB190 (8.0 SDM),

terminal 13 and the passenger's air bag inflator module connector YB208 for faults.

6. This test check s the wiring between the SDM wiring harness c onnector YB189 (8.1 SDM) or YB190 (8.0 SDM),

terminal 14 and the passenger's air bag inflator module connector YB208 for faults.

NOTES ON DIAGNOSTIC CHART

1. For all wiring harness checking procedures, refer to Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS in this Service

Information CD.

2. Refer to 2.8 SRS WIRING REPAIR in Section 12M SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM - (VERSION

6.2) in this Service Information CD before conducting any SRS wiring harness repairs.

3. Refer to Section 12N FUSES & WIRING HARNESSES in this Service Information CD f or SRS wiring harnes s

routing.

4. Resistance cannot be measur ed between the two term inals in connec tor YB208 as the in-built c apacitor block s

measurement. Therefore, a ‘service hole’ is incorporated into the connector for fault tracing. Refer to

1.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS, WIRING HARNESS in this Section for more details on this type of connector.

5. Wiring should be checked at point where TECH 2 screen display changed. If necessary, split open wiring

harness.

6. If fault cannot be identified, the wiring harness should be replaced.

Figure 12M-95

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. ∙Connect TECH 2 to DLC.

∙Select Body / SRS /

Diagnostic Trouble Codes

/ Read DTC Information.

∙Does TECH 2 display

DTC 34 as a Current

DTC?

Go to Step 2. Go to Step 3.

2. ∙With TECH 2 still

connected to DLC, select

Body / SRS / Data Display

and scroll to

PASSENGER’S AIR BAG

LOOP RESISTANCE'.

∙Is value displayed on

TECH 2 as specified?

Approx.

1.6 - 6.4

Ohms

Go to Step 3. Go to Step 4.

3. ∙Remove instrument panel

compartment to gain

access to passenger’s air

bag, refer to Section 1A3

INSTRUMENT PANEL

AND CONSOLE.

∙With TECH 2 still

connected, select

Diagnostic Trouble Codes

/ Clear DTC Information

and clear all (if any)

DTCs.

∙Select Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Read DTC

Information, 'wiggle' SRS

wiring harness at all

locations between the

SDM and the passenger’s

air bag wiring harness

connector YB208, while

monitoring TECH 2

screen display.

∙Does TECH 2 screen

display change status

from No Diagnostic

Trouble Codes?

Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTE to 2 & 5

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

Fault not present.

Check all system

wiring harness

connectors, and

terminals (refer to

NOTE 6 above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

4. ∙Disable the SRS, refer to

2.2 SYSTEM DISABLING

AND ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect passenger’s

air bag inflator module

wiring harness connector

YB208.

∙Connect Tool No.

SD28280B to SRS wiring

harness connector

YB208.

∙With TECH 2 still

connected, select Body /

SRS / Data Display and

scroll to PASSENGER’S

AIR BAG LOOP

RESISTANCE'.

∙Is value displayed on

TECH 2 as specified?

Approx.

3.0

Ohms

Replace

passenger’s air

bag inflator

module assembly,

refer to 2.4

FRONT

PASSENGER’S

AIR BAG

MODULE

ASSEMBLY in

Section 12M

SUPPLEMENTAL

RESTRAINT

SYSTEM -

(VERSION 6.2).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

Go to Step 5.

5. ∙Disconnect SDM wiring

harness connector

YB189/YB190 from the

SDM.

∙Remove Tool SD28280B

from YB208.

∙Using Tool KM-609-20,

check wiring between

SDM wiring harness

connector YB189/YB190,

terminals 13 and

passenger’s air bag

inflator module connector

YB208, circuit 349

(Yellow/Black wire) for

short to earth (refer to

NOTE 1 above).

∙Is all OK?

Go to Step 6. Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

6. ∙With SDM wiring harness

connector YB189/ YB190

disconnected from the

SDM and using Tool KM-

609-20, check wiring

between SDM wiring

harness connector

YB189/ YB190, terminal

14 and passenger’s air

bag inflator module

connector YB208, circuit

350 (Grey/Black wire) for

a short to earth (refer to

NOTES 1 and 4 above).

∙Is all OK?

Replace SDM,

refer to 2.4

SENSING AND

DIAGNOSTIC

MODULE (SDM)

in this Section.

Recheck circuit to

verify repair.

Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

WHEN ALL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIRS A RE COMPLETED, ENSURE ALL SRS

COMPONENTS ARE RECONNECTED, CLEAR ALL DTC’S, ENABLE THE SRS AND

VERIFY CORRECT OPERATION

DTC 35 - PASSENGER AIR BAG CIRCUIT CAPACITANCE TOO HIGH

Figure 12M-96

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

At ignition on, and on a constant monitoring cycle of every 500 milliseconds during the ignition cycle, the SDM

performs a system self check.

If the SDM detects the capacitance in the passenger’s air bag circuit is too high (greater than 550 nF) for longer

than 3 - 5 seconds, a current DTC 35 will set (refer to 3.3 SRS SELF DIAGNOSTICS in this Section for more

details).

DTC 35 will set if the in-built capacitor in the SRS wiring harness connector YB208 is faulty.

When DTC 35 sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS warning lamp and sets a current DTC 35. Should the fault

conditions detected by the SDM clear during the same ignition cycle, the current code will clear and become a

history DTC 35. The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

If a DTC 35 is set, the SRS warning lam p is illuminated on each ignition cycle, even if the DTC is set as a history

DTC, until the f ault conditions for setting DTC 35 ar e rectified and the DT C (c urrent or history) can then be cleared

from the SDM via TECH 2.

ACTION REQUIRED

If DTC 35 is set, the passenger’s air bag may not operate and therefore, the SRS ‘pigtail’ wiring harness with

connector YB208 (between passenger air bag and SRS wiring harness) must be replaced.

After the SRS ‘pigtail’ wiring harness between the passenger air bag and the SRS wiring harness has been

replaced, ensure that all SRS components are reconnected, clear DTCs, enable the SRS and verify the correct

operation of the system (i.e. warning lamp not illuminated after five seconds of ignition being switched ON).

DTC 36 - PASSENGER AIR BAG CIRCUIT CAPACITANCE TOO LOW

Figure 12M-97

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

At ignition on, and on a constant monitoring cycle of every 500 milliseconds during the ignition cycle, the SDM

performs a system self check.

If the SDM detects the capacitanc e in the passenger ’s air bag c irc uit is too low (les s than 390 nF ) for longer than 3 -

5 seconds, a current DTC 36 will set (refer to 3.3 SRS SELF DIAGNOSTICS in this Section for more details).

DTC 36 will set if the in-built capacitor in the SRS wiring harness connector YB208 is faulty.

When DTC 36 sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS warning lamp and sets a current DTC 36. Should the fault

conditions detected by the SDM clear during the same ignition cycle, the current code will clear and become a

history DTC 36. The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

If a DTC 36 is set, the SRS warning lam p is illuminated on each ignition cycle, even if the DTC is set as a history

DTC, until the f ault conditions for setting DTC 36 ar e rectified and the DT C (c urrent or history) can then be cleared

from the SDM via TECH 2.

ACTION REQUIRED

If DTC 36 is set, the passenger’s air bag may not operate and therefore, the SRS ‘pigtail’ wiring harness with

connector YB208 (between passenger air bag and SRS wiring harness) must be replaced.

After the SRS ‘pigtail’ wiring harness between the passenger air bag and the SRS wiring harness has been

replaced, ensure that all SRS components are reconnected, clear DTCs, enable the SRS and verify the correct

operation of the system (i.e. warning lamp not illuminated after five seconds of ignition being switched ON).

Techline

DTC 37 - PASSENGER AIR BAG CIRCUIT RESISTANCE TOO HIGH

Figure 12M-98

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

At ignition on, and on a constant monitoring cycle of every 500 milliseconds during the ignition cycle, the SDM

performs a system self check.

If the SDM detects a resistance in the passenger’s air bag circuit that is too high (greater than 8.4 ohm ) for longer

than 3 - 5 seconds, a current DTC 37 will set (refer to 3.3 SRS SELF DIAGNOSTICS in this Section for more

details).

DTC 37 will set if circuits 349 or 350 (including the passenger’s air bag inflator module) are open circuit.

When DTC 37 sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS warning lamp and sets a current DTC 37. Should the fault

conditions detected by the SDM clear during the same ignition cycle, the current code will clear and become a

history DTC 37. The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

If a DTC 37 is set, the SRS warning lam p is illuminated on each ignition cycle, even if the DTC is set as a history

DTC, until the f ault conditions for setting DTC 37 ar e rectified and the DT C (c urrent or history) can then be cleared

from the SDM via TECH 2.

If DTC 37 is set, dependent on where the fault is, the passenger’s air bag may not operate.

TEST DESCRIPTION

The following number refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart:

1. Uses TECH 2 to check if DTC 37 is current or history.

2. Checks for intermittent fault by monitoring TECH 2 screen. If screen display changes during a wiring 'wiggle'

test, a fault with the wiring is at that location.

3. Tool SD28280B is a dummy load taking the place of the passenger’s air bag inflator module. If DTC 37

becomes a history DTC with dummy load connected, the system fault is in the passenger’s air bag inflator

module.

4. Checks circuit 349 for open circuit.

5. Checks circuit 350 for open circuit.

NOTES ON DIAGNOSTIC CHART

1. For all wiring harness checking procedures, refer to Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS in this Service

Information CD.

2. Refer to 2.8 SRS WIRING REPAIR in this Sec tion 12M SUPPLEMENTAL REST RAINT SYST EM - ( VERSION

6.2) in this Service Information CD before conducting any SRS wiring harness repairs.

3. Resistance cannot be measured between the two terminals in connector YB208, as the in-built capacitor

blocks measurement. Therefore, a ‘service hole’ is incorporated into the connector for fault tracing. Refer to

1.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS, WIRING HARNESS in this Section for more details on this type of connector.

Figure 12M-99

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. ∙Install TECH 2 to DLC.

∙Select Body / SRS /

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Read DTC

Information.

∙Is DTC 37 current?

Go to Step 3. Go to Step 2.

2. ∙Remove instrument

panel compartment to

gain access to

passenger’s air bag,

refer to Section 1A3

INSTRUMENT PANEL

AND CONSOLE.

∙With TECH 2 still

connected, select

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Clear DTC

Information and clear

all (if any) DTCs.

∙Select Diagnostic

Trouble Codes / Read

DTC Information,

'wiggle' SRS wiring

harness at all locations

between the SDM and

the passenger’s air

bag wiring harness

connector YB208,

while monitoring

TECH 2 screen

display.

∙Does TECH 2 screen

display change status

from No Diagnostic

Trouble Codes?

Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

Fault not present.

Check all system

wiring harness

connectors, and

terminals.

Clear DTC and

recheck system.

3. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect the

passenger’s air bag

inflator module wiring

harness connector

YB208.

∙Connect Tool No.

SD28280B to SRS

wiring harness

connector YB208.

∙Reconnect battery.

∙Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

∙Select Body / SRS /

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Read DTC

Information.

∙Is DTC 37 still

current?

Go to Step 4. Replace

passenger’s air

bag inflator

module assembly,

refer to 2.4

FRONT

PASSENGER’S

AIR BAG

MODULE

ASSEMBLY in

Section 12M

SUPPLEMENTAL

RESTRAINT

SYSTEM -

(VERSION 6.2).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

4. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect SDM

wiring harness

connector

YB189/YB190 from

the SDM.

∙Remove Tool No.

SD28280B from SRS

wiring harness

connector YB208.

∙With SRS wiring

harness connector

YB208 disconnected,

and using Tool KM-

609-20, check wiring

between SDM wiring

harness connector

YB189/YB190,

terminal 13 and SRS

wiring harness

connector YB208,

circuit 349

(Yellow/Black wire) for

open circuit (refer to

NOTE 1 and 3 above).

∙Is all OK?

Go to Step 5. Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

5. ∙With SDM wiring

harness connector

YB189/YB190 and

SRS wiring harness

connector YB208

disconnected from and

using Tool KM-609-20,

check wiring between

SDM wiring harness

connector

YB189/YB190,

terminal 14 and SRS

wiring harness

connector YB208,

circuit 350 (Grey /

Black wire) for open

circuit (refer to NOTE

1 and 3 above).

∙Is all OK?

Replace SDM,

refer to 2.4

SENSING AND

DIAGNOSTIC

MODULE in this

Section.

Recheck circuit to

verify repair.

Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

WHEN ALL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIRS A RE COMPLETED, ENSURE ALL SRS

COMPONENTS ARE RECONNECTED, CLEAR ALL DTC’S, ENABLE THE SRS AND

VERIFY CORRECT OPERATION

DTC 38 - PASSENGER AIR BAG CIRCUIT RESISTANCE TOO LOW

Figure 12M-100

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

At ignition on, and on a constant monitoring cycle of every 500 milliseconds during the ignition cycle, the SDM

performs a system self check.

If the SDM detects a resistance in the pas senger’s air bag c ircuit that is too low (less than 0.6 ohm ) f or longer than

3 - 5 seconds, a current DTC 38 will set (refer to 3.3 SRS SELF DIA GNOSTICS in this Section for more details).

DTC 38 will set if circuits 349 or 350, (including the passenger’s air bag inflator module assembly) are shorted

together.

When DTC 38 sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS warning lamp and sets a current DTC 38. Should the fault

conditions detected by the SDM clear during the same ignition cycle, the current code will clear and become a

history DTC 38. The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

If a DTC 38 is set, the SRS warning lam p is illuminated on each ignition cycle, even if the DTC is set as a history

DTC, until the f ault conditions for setting DTC 38 ar e rectified and the DT C (c urrent or history) can then be cleared

from the SDM via TECH 2.

If DTC 38 is set, dependent on where the fault is, the passenger’s air bag may not operate.

TEST DESCRIPTION

The following number refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart:

1. Uses TECH 2 to check if DTC 38 is current or history.

2. Checks for intermittent fault by monitoring TECH 2 screen. If screen display changes during a wiring 'wiggle'

test, a fault with the wiring is at that location.

3. Tool SD28280B is a dummy load taking the place of the passenger’s air bag inflator module. If DTC 34

becomes a history DTC with dummy load connected, the system fault is in the passenger’s air bag inflator

module.

4. This test c heck s the wiring between the SDM wiring harness connec tor YB189 (8.1 SDM) or YB190 (8.0 SDM)

and SRS wiring harness connector YB208 for a short circuit.

NOTES ON DIAGNOSTIC CHART

1. For all wiring harness checking procedures, refer to Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS in this Service

Information CD.

2. Refer to 2.8 SRS WIRING REPAIR in this Sec tion 12M SUPPLEMENTAL REST RAINT SYST EM - ( VERSION

6.2) before conducting any SRS wiring harness repairs.

3. Resistance cannot be measured between the two terminals in connector YB208, as the in-built capacitor

blocks measurement. Therefore, a ‘service hole’ is incorporated into the connector for fault tracing. Refer to

1.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS, WIRING HARNESS in this Section for more details on this type of connector.

Figure 12M-101

Techline

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. ∙Install TECH 2 to DLC.

∙Select Body / SRS /

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Read DTC

Information.

∙Is DTC 38 current?

Go to Step 3. Go to Step 2.

2. ∙Remove instrument

panel compartment to

gain access to

passenger’s air bag,

refer to Section 1A3

INSTRUMENT PANEL

AND CONSOLE.

∙With TECH 2 still

connected, select

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Clear DTC

Information and clear

all (if any) DTCs.

∙Select Diagnostic

Trouble Codes / Read

DTC Information,

'wiggle' SRS wiring

harness at all locations

between the SDM and

the passenger’s air

bag wiring harness

connector YB208,

while monitoring

TECH 2 screen

display.

∙Does TECH 2 screen

display change status

from No Diagnostic

Trouble Codes?

Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

Fault not present.

Check all system

wiring harness

connectors, and

terminals.

Clear DTC and

recheck system.

3. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 DISABLING

AND ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect the

passenger’s air bag

inflator module wiring

harness connector

YB208.

∙Connect Tool No.

SD28280B to SRS

wiring harness

connector YB208.

∙Reconnect battery.

∙Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

∙Select Body / SRS /

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Read DTC

Information.

∙Is DTC 38 still

current?

Go to Step 4. Replace

passenger’s air

bag inflator

module assembly,

refer to 2.4

FRONT

PASSENGER’S

AIR BAG

MODULE

ASSEMBLY in

Section 12M

SUPPLEMENTAL

RESTRAINT

SYSTEM.

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

4. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 DISABLING

AND ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect SDM

wiring harness

connector

YB189/YB190 from

the SDM.

∙Disconnect Tool No.

SD28280B from SRS

wiring harness

connector YB208.

∙With SRS wiring

harness connector

YB208 disconnected,

and using Tool KM-

609-20, check for

continuity between

SDM wiring harness

connector YB189/

YB190, terminal 13,

circuit 349

(Yellow/Black wire)

and terminal 14, circuit

350 (Grey/Black

wire)(refer to NOTES

1 and 3 above).

∙Does continuity exist?

Repair short in

circuits 349 and

350, between

SDM wiring

harness

connector

YB189/YB190 and

YB208 as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

Replace SDM,

refer to 2.4

SENSING AND

DIAGNOSTIC

MODULE (SDM)

in this Section.

Recheck circuit to

verify repair.

WHEN ALL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIRS A RE COMPLETED, ENSURE ALL SRS

COMPONENTS ARE RECONNECTED, CLEAR ALL DTC’S, ENABLE THE SRS AND

VERIFY CORRECT OPERATION

DTC 247 - PASSENGER AIR BAG CIRCUIT POWER STAGE ERROR

T12M127

SDM

YB191

YB189

YB190

YB200

YB208

PASSENGER

AIRBAG

INFLATOR

PASSENGER

IRBAG INFLATOR (+)

PASSENGER

IRBAG INFLATOR (-)

Y/B (3 4 9)

GY/B (350)

Figure 12M-102

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

At ignition on, the SDM perfor ms an initial system self check of the SDM power stages . If during this initial self test

the SDM detects a fault with the passenger air bag power stage a current DTC 247 Passenger Air Bag Circuit

Power Stage Error will set. On completion of the initial system self test the SDM then performs a test of the

Passenger Air Bag Circuit. If the SDM detects a problem with this circuit the associated Passenger Air Bag Circuit

DTC will be set and the DTC 247 Passenger Air Bag Circuit Power Stage Error will become a history DTC.

DTC 247 Passenger Air Bag Circuit Power Stage Error will set if a fault occurs in the passenger air bag circuit,

connector YB208 with the in-built capacitor, connector YB200, connector YB191, the SRS wiring harness, connector

YB189/YB190 or SDM.

W hen a histor y DT C 247 Passenger Air Bag Circ uit Power Stage Error sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS warning

lamp. Should the fault conditions detected by the SDM clear during the same ignition cycle the code will remain a

history DTC 247 Passenger Air Bag Circuit Power Stage Err or for all ignition c ycles until c leared. The SRS warning

lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

When a DTC 247 Passenger Air Bag Circuit Power Stage Error sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS warning lamp for

the rem ainder of the ignition cycle. Should the fault conditions detected by the SDM clear during the sam e ignition

cycle the code will remain a history DTC 247 Passenger Air Bag Circuit Power Stage Error for all ignition cycles until

cleared. The SRS warning lamp will also remain illuminated until the history DTC 247 Passenger Air Bag Circuit

Power Stage Error is cleared.

If a DT C 247 Passenger Air Bag Circ uit Power Stage is set, dependent on where the f ault is, the pass enger air bag

may not operate.

ACTION REQUIRED

If DTC 247 Passenger Air Bag Circuit Power Stage Error and any other DTC is set then the diagnostics for the other

DTC s hould be car r ied out f ir st. F or ex ample if a DTC 247 Pass enger Air Bag Circ uit Power Stage Err or and a DTC

37 Passenger Air Bag Circuit Resistance High are set, the diagnostics for a DTC 37 Passenger Air Bag Circuit

Resistance High should be carried out first.

If only a DTC 247 Passenger Air Bag Circuit Power Stage Error is set then the SDM should be replaced.

NOTE: An intermittent in the passenger air bag circuit may cause a DTC 247 Passenger Air Bag Circuit Power

Stage Error to set.

After the fault has been rectified, ensure that all SRS components are reconnected, clear DTCs, enable the SRS

and verify the correct operation of the system (i.e. warning lamp not illuminated after five seconds of ignition being

switched ON).

TEST DESCRIPTION

The following numbers refer to Step numbers in the following diagnostic chart.

1. Uses TECH 2 to check if a DTC 247 Passenger Air Bag Circuit Power Stage Error is history code, and if any

other passenger air bag circuit current or history DTCs are set. If any other DTCs are set refer to these DTCs

first.

2. Checks for intermittent fault by monitoring TECH 2 screen during ignition on cycle. If screen display changes

during a wiring 'wiggle' test, a fault with the wiring is at that location.

IF NO OTHER DTCS ARE SET AND THERE ARE NO INTERMITTENTS IN THE PASSENGER AIR BAG

CIRCUIT THEN THE SDM SHOULD BE REPLACED.

NOTES ON DIAGNOSTIC CHART

1. For all wiring harness checking procedures, refer to VT Series 1 Service Information, WIRING DIAGRAMS,

SECTION 12P.

2. Refer to VT Series 1 Service Information Section 12M, SRS VERSION 6.2, 2.8 SRS WIRING REPAIR before

conducting any SRS wiring harness repairs.

T12M172

YB189

8.1 SDM

WIRING

HARNESS

CONNECTOR

BR/B (3 93)

50 25

BLU/B (351) R/B (352)

BR/W (353)

Y/R (354)

P/B (739 )

B (3 05)

G/W (1220)

W (3 4 7)

G (348)

Y/B (349 )

GY/B (350)

Y/G (38 5 )

BR/G (386)

Y/W (387)

BR/W (388)

Y/BL U ( 3 92)

GY/W (407)

LBLU (408) +VE-VE

GY/B (350) Y/B (349)

CAP

ALSO -VE

YB208

PASSENGER

AIRBA G INFLATOR

BLU/B (351)

R/B (352)

BR/W (353)

Y/R (354)

P/B (739)

G/W (1220)

W (3 4 7)

G (348)

Y/B (349)

GY/B (350)

YB190

8.0 SDM WIRING

HARNESS

CONNECTOR

Y/B (349)

GY/B (350)

YB200

PASSENGER A IRBA G

CONNEC TOR HARNESS

Figure 12M-103

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. • Install TECH 2 to DLC.

• Select Body / SRS / Diagnostic Trouble Codes /

Read DTC Information.

• Is a DTC 247 Passenger Air Bag Circuit Power

Stage Error a history DTC, and are any other

passenger air bag circuit DTCs set?

Go to other

passenger air

bag circuit DTC

diagnostic chart

in this Section.

Go to Step 2.

2. • Remove instrument panel compartment to gain

access to passenger air bag, refer to Section 1A3

INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONSOLE.

• With TECH 2 still connected, select Diagnostic

Trouble Codes / Clear DTC Information and clear all

(if any) DTCs.

• Select Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC

Information, 'wiggle' SRS wiring harness at all

locations between the SDM and the passenger air

bag wiring harness connector YB208, while

monitoring TECH 2 screen display.

• Does TECH 2 screen display change status from

No Diagnostic Trouble Codes?

Go to applicable

DTC chart in this

Section.

Go to step 3.

3 • Replace SDM, refer to VT Series 1 Service

Information Section 12M, SRS VERSION 8.0 & 8.1,

2.4 SENSING AND DIAGNOSTIC MODULE (SDM).

Recheck circuit to verify repair.

WHEN ALL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIRS ARE COMPLETED, ENSURE ALL SRS COMPONENTS ARE

RECONNECTED, CLEAR ALL DTC’S, ENABLE THE SRS AND VERIFY CORRECT OPERATION

DTC 49 - LEFT HAND PRE-TENSIONER CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

Figure 12M-104

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

At ignition on, and on a constant monitoring cycle of every 500 milliseconds during the ignition cycle, the SDM

performs a system self check.

If the SDM detects a resistance to battery supply is less than 5 k ohms in either the positive and/or negative circuit

for m ore than 3 - 5 seconds, a current DTC 49 will set (refer to 3.3 SRS SELF DIAGNOSTICS in this Section for

more details).

DTC 49 will set if circuits 351 (left hand pre-tensioner positive side) and/or 352 (left hand pre-tensioner negative

side) are shorted to battery +.

When DTC 49 sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS warning lamp and sets a current DTC 49. Should the fault

conditions detected by the SDM clear during the same ignition cycle, the current code will clear and become a

history DTC 49. The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

If a DTC 49 is set, the SRS warning lam p is illuminated on each ignition cycle, even if the DTC is set as a history

DTC, until the f ault conditions for setting DTC 49 ar e rectified and the DT C (c urrent or history) can then be cleared

from the SDM via TECH 2.

If DTC 49 is set, the SRS, including the left hand pre-tensioner, will still be operational.

TEST DESCRIPTION

The following number refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart:

1. Uses TECH 2 to check if DTC 49 is current or history.

2. Checks for intermittent fault by monitoring TECH 2 screen. If screen display changes during a wiring 'wiggle'

test, a fault with the wiring is at that location.

3. Checks circuits 351 and 352 for a short to battery +.

NOTES ON DIAGNOSTIC CHART

1. For all wiring harness checking procedures, refer to Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS in this Service

Information CD.

2. Refer to 2.8 SRS WIRING REPAIR in Section 12M SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM - (VERSION

6.2) before conducting any SRS wiring harness repairs.

3. Resistance cannot be measured between the two terminals in connector YB209, as the in-built capacitor

blocks measurement. Therefore, a ‘service hole’ is incorporated into the connector for fault tracing. Refer to

1.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS, WIRING HARNESS in this Section for more details on this type of connector.

4. W iring should be checked at point where TECH 2 screen display changed status. If necessary, split open the

harness.

5. If the fault can not be identified, the harness should be replaced.

Figure 12M-105

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. ∙Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

∙Select Body / SRS /

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Read DTC

Information.

∙Is DTC 49 current ?

Go to Step 3. Go to Step 2.

2. ∙With TECH 2 still

connected, select

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Clear DTC

Information and clear

all (if any) DTCs.

∙Select Diagnostic

Trouble Codes / Read

DTC Information,

'wiggle' SRS wiring

harness at all locations

between the SDM and

the left hand pre-

tensioner wiring

harness connector

YB209, while

monitoring TECH 2

screen display.

∙Does TECH 2 screen

display change status

from No Diagnostic

Trouble Codes?

Make repairs as

necessary (refer to

NOTE 2 & 4

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

Fault not present.

Check all system

wiring harness

connectors, and

terminals, ref er to

NOTE 5 above.

Clear DTC and

recheck system.

3. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect the SRS

wiring harness

connector YB209 from

the left hand pre-

tensioner assembly.

∙Disconnect SDM wiring

harness connector

YB189/YB190 from the

SDM.

∙Reconnect battery.

∙Using Tool KM-609-20,

check wiring between

SDM wiring harness

connector

YB189/YB190,

terminals 1 and 2 and

left hand pre-tensioner

connector YB209,

circuits 351 (Blue/Black

wire) and 352

(Red/Black wire) for

short to battery + (refer

to NOTES 1 and 3

above).

∙Is all OK?

Replace SDM,

refer to 2.4

SENSING AND

DIAGNOSTIC

MODULE (SDM) in

this Section.

Recheck circuit to

verify repair.

Make repairs as

necessary (refer to

NOTE 2 above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

WHEN ALL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIRS ARE COMPLETED, ENSURE ALL SRS

COMPONENTS ARE RECONNECTED, CLEAR ALL DTC’S, ENABLE THE SRS AND

VERIFY CORRECT OPERATION

DTC 50 - LEFT HAND PRE-TENSIONER CIRCUIT SHORT TO EARTH

Figure 12M-106

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

At ignition on, and on a constant monitoring cycle of every 500 milliseconds during the ignition cycle, the SDM

performs a s ystem s elf c heck. If the SDM detec ts a r es istanc e to earth of less than 3 k ohms in either the pos itive or

negative circuit for more than 3 - 5 seconds, a current DT C 50 will set (ref er to 3.3 SRS SELF DIAGNOST ICS in

this Section for more details).

DTC 50 will set if circuits 351 (left hand pre-tensioner positive side) and/or 352 (left hand pre-tensioner negative

side) are shorted to earth.

When DTC 50 sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS warning lamp and sets a current DTC 50. Should the fault

conditions detected by the SDM clear during the same ignition cycle, the current code will clear and become a

history DTC 50. The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

If a DTC 50 is set, the SRS warning lam p is illuminated on each ignition cycle, even if the DTC is set as a history

DTC, until the f ault conditions for setting DTC 50 ar e rectified and the DT C (c urrent or history) can then be cleared

from the SDM via TECH 2.

If DTC 50 is set, the SRS, including the left hand pre-tensioner, will still be operational.

TEST DESCRIPTION

The following number refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart:

1. Uses TECH 2 to determine if DTC 50 is current or history.

2. TECH 2 in this mode should display approximately 1.6 - 6.4 ohms if the left hand pre-tensioner loop circuit is

OK.

3. If screen display changes during a wiring 'wiggle' test, a fault with the wiring is at that location.

4. Tool SD28280B is a dummy load taking the place of the pre-tensioner assembly. If TECH 2 displays the

correct resistance of the dummy load, the system fault is in the pre-tensioner assembly.

5. This test check s the wiring between the SDM wiring harness c onnector YB189 (8.1 SDM) or YB190 (8.0 SDM),

terminal 1 and the left hand pre-tensioner connector YB209 for faults.

6. This test check s the wiring between the SDM wiring harness c onnector YB189 (8.1 SDM) or YB190 (8.0 SDM),

terminal 2 and the left hand pre-tensioner connector YB209 for faults.

NOTES ON DIAGNOSTIC CHART

1. For all wiring harness checking procedures, refer to Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS in this Service

Information CD.

2. Refer to 2.8 SRS WIRING REPAIR in this Sec tion 12M SUPPLEMENTAL REST RAINT SYST EM - ( VERSION

6.2) before conducting any SRS wiring harness repairs.

3. Refer to Section 12N FUSES & WIRING HARNESSES in this Service Information CD f or SRS wiring harnes s

routing.

4. Resistance cannot be measur ed between the two term inals in connec tor YB209 as the in-built c apacitor block s

measurement. Therefore, a ‘service hole’ is incorporated into the connector for fault tracing. Refer to

1.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS, WIRING HARNESS in this Section for more details on this type of connector.

5. Wiring should be checked at point where TECH 2 screen display changed. If necessary, split open wiring

harness.

6. If fault cannot be identified, the wiring harness should be replaced.

Figure 12M-107

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. ∙Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

∙Select Body / SRS /

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Read DTC

Information.

∙Does TECH 2 display

DTC 50 as a Current

DTC?

Go to Step 2. Go to Step 3.

2. ∙With TECH 2 still

connected, select Body

/ SRS / Data Display

and scroll to LEFT

HAND PRE-

TENSIONER LOOP

RESISTANCE'.

∙Is the resistanc e value

displayed on TECH 2

as specified?

Approx.

1.6 - 6.4

Ohms

Go to Step 3. Go to Step 4.

3. ∙With TECH 2 still

connected, select

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Clear DTC

Information and clear

all (if any) DTCs.

∙Select Diagnostic

Trouble Codes / Read

DTC Information,

'wiggle' SRS wiring

harness at all locations

between the SDM and

the left hand pre-

tensioner wiring

harness connector

YB209, while

monitoring TECH 2

screen display.

∙Does TECH 2 screen

display change status

from No Diagnostic

Trouble Codes?

Make repairs as

necessary (refer to

NOTES 2 &

5 above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

Fault not present.

Check all system

wiring harness

connectors, and

terminals, ref er to

NOTE 6 above.

Clear DTC and

recheck system.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

4. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect left hand

pre-tensioner wiring

harness connector

YB209 from pre-

tensioner.

∙Connect Tool No.

SD28280B to SRS

wiring harness

connector YB209.

∙With TECH 2 still

connected, select Body

/ SRS / Data Display

and scroll to LEFT

HAND PRE-

TENSIONER LOOP

RESISTANCE'.

∙Is the resistanc e value

displayed on TECH 2

as specified?

Approx.

3.0

Ohms

Replace left hand

pre-tensioner

assembly, refer to

Section 1A7 SEAT

AND SEAT BELT

ASSEMBLIES.

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

Go to Step 5.

5. ∙Disconnect SDM wiring

harness connector

YB189/YB190 from the

SDM.

∙Remove Tool

SD28280B from YB209.

∙Using Tool KM-609-20,

check wiring between

SDM wiring harness

connector

YB189/YB190, terminal

1 and left hand pre-

tensioner connector

YB209, circuit 351

(Blue/ Brown wire) for

short to earth (refer to

NOTE 1 above).

∙Is all OK?

Go to Step 6. Make repairs as

necessary (refer to

NOTE 2 above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

6. ∙With SDM wiring

harness connector

YB189/YB190

disconnected from the

SDM and using Tool

KM-609-20, check

wiring between SDM

wiring harness

connector YB189/

YB190, terminal 2 and

left hand pre-tensioner

connector YB209,

circuit 352 (Red/Black

wire) for a short to earth

(refer to NOTES 1 and

4 above).

∙Is all OK?

Replace SDM,

refer to 2.7

SENSING AND

DIAGNOSTIC

MODULE in this

Section.

Recheck circuit to

verify repair.

Make repairs as

necessary (refer to

NOTE 2 above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

WHEN ALL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIRS ARE COMPLETED, ENSURE ALL SRS

COMPONENTS ARE RECONNECTED, CLEAR ALL DTC’S, ENABLE THE SRS AND

VERIFY CORRECT OPERATION

DTC 51 - LEFT HAND PRE-TENSIONER CIRCUIT CAPACITANCE TOO HIGH

Figure 12M-108

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

At ignition on, and on a constant monitoring cycle of every 500 milliseconds during the ignition cycle, the SDM

performs a system self check.

If the SDM detects the capacitance in the lef t hand pre-tensioner circuit is too high (greater than 550 nF ) for longer

than 3 - 5 seconds, a current DTC 51 will set (refer to 3.3 SRS SELF DIAGNOSTICS in this Section for more

details).

DTC 51 will set if the in-built capacitor in the SRS wiring harness connector YB209 is faulty.

When DTC 51 sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS warning lamp and sets a current DTC 51. Should the fault

conditions detected by the SDM clear during the same ignition cycle, the current code will clear and become a

history DTC 51. The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

If a DTC 51 is set, the SRS warning lam p is illuminated on each ignition cycle, even if the DTC is set as a history

DTC, until the f ault conditions for setting DTC 51 ar e rectified and the DT C (c urrent or history) can then be cleared

from the SDM via TECH 2.

ACTION REQUIRED

If DT C 51 is set, the left hand pre-tensioner may not operate and therefore, the SRS pre-tensioner wiring harness,

with connector YB209 (between left hand pre-tensioner and SRS connector YB207) must be replaced.

NOTE:

Before r emoving the SRS pr e-tensioner wiring harness, tak e note of wiring harness r outing and how it is retained to

the front seat.

After the SRS pre-tensioner wiring harness, between the pre-tensioner and SRS wiring harness connector YB207

has been replaced, ensure all SRS components are reconnected, clear DTCs, enable the SRS and verify the

correct operation of the system (i.e. warning lamp not illuminated after five seconds of ignition being switched ON).

NOTE:

After the wiring harness has been replaced, the front seat should be put through its full adjustment

(forward/backwards, full recline and up and down) to ensure that the wiring harness does not foul with any of the

seat components.

DTC 52 - LEFT HAND PRE-TENSIONER CIRCUIT CAPACITANCE TOO LOW

Figure 12M-109

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

At ignition on, and on a constant monitoring cycle of every 500 milliseconds during the ignition cycle, the SDM

performs a system self check.

If the SDM detects the c apacitanc e in the lef t hand pr e-tensioner circuit is too low (less than 390 nF) f or longer than

3 - 5 seconds, a current DTC 52 will set (refer to 3.3 SRS SELF DIA GNOSTICS in this Section for more details).

DTC 52 will set if the in-built capacitor in the SRS wiring harness connector YB209 is faulty.

When DTC 52 sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS warning lamp and sets a current DTC 52. Should the fault

conditions detected by the SDM clear during the same ignition cycle, the current code will clear and become a

history DTC 52. The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

If a DTC 52 is set, the SRS warning lam p is illuminated on each ignition cycle, even if the DTC is set as a history

DTC, until the f ault conditions for setting DTC 52 ar e rectified and the DT C (c urrent or history) can then be cleared

from the SDM via TECH 2.

ACTION REQUIRED

If DT C 52 is set, the left hand pre-tensioner may not operate and therefore, the SRS pre-tensioner wiring harness,

with connector YB209 (between left hand pre-tensioner and SRS connector YB207) must be replaced.

NOTE:

Before r emoving the SRS pr e-tensioner wiring harness, tak e note of wiring harness r outing and how it is retained to

the front seat.

After the SRS pre-tensioner wiring harness, between the pre-tensioner and SRS wiring harness connector YB207

has been replaced, ensure that all SRS components are reconnected, clear DTCs, enable the SRS and verify the

correct operation of the system (i.e. warning lamp not illuminated after five seconds of ignition being switched ON).

NOTE:

After the wiring harness has been replaced, the front seat should be put through its full adjustment

(forward/backwards, full recline and up and down) to ensure that the wiring harness does not foul with any of the

seat components.

DTC 53 - LEFT HAND PRE-TENSIONER CIRCUIT RESISTANCE TOO HIGH

Figure 12M-110

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

At ignition on, and on a constant monitoring cycle of every 500 milliseconds during the ignition cycle, the SDM

performs a system self check.

If the SDM detects a resistance in the left hand pre-tensioner circuit that is too high (greater than 8.4 ohm) for

longer than 3 - 5 seconds, a current DTC 53 will set (refer to 3.3 SRS SELF DIAGNOSTICS in this Section for

more details).

DTC 53 will set if circuits 351 or 352 (including the left hand pre-tensioner assembly) are open circuit.

When DTC 53 sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS warning lamp and sets a current DTC 53. Should the fault

conditions detected by the SDM clear during the same ignition cycle, the current code will clear and become a

history DTC 53. The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

If a DTC 53 is set, the SRS warning lam p is illuminated on each ignition cycle, even if the DTC is set as a history

DTC, until the f ault conditions for setting DTC 53 ar e rectified and the DT C (c urrent or history) can then be cleared

from the SDM via TECH 2.

If DTC 53 is set, dependent on where the fault is, the left hand pre-tensioner may not operate.

TEST DESCRIPTION

The following number refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart:

1. Uses TECH 2 to check if DTC 53 is current or history.

2. Checks for intermittent fault by monitoring TECH 2 screen. If screen display changes during a wiring 'wiggle'

test, a fault with the wiring is at that location.

3. Tool SD28280B is a dum m y load taking the place of the left hand pr e-tensioner as sem bly. If DTC 53 becom es

a history DTC with dummy load connected, the system fault is in the left hand pre-tensioner assembly.

4. Checks if open circuit is in the SRS connector harness. If c onnector YB207 is disconnected and it’s ter minal’s

are bridged together, DTC 53 will become a history DTC if this connector harness is faulty.

5. Checks circuit 351 for open circuit.

6. Checks circuit 352 for open circuit.

NOTES ON DIAGNOSTIC CHART

1. For all wiring harness checking procedures, refer to Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS in this Service

Information CD.

2. Refer to 2.8 SRS WIRING REPAIR in Section 12M SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM - (VERSION

6.2) before conducting any SRS wiring harness repairs.

Figure 12M-111

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. ∙Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

∙Select Body / SRS /

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Read DTC

Information.

∙Is DTC 53 current?

Go to Step 3. Go to Step 2.

2. ∙With TECH 2 still

connected, select

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Clear DTC

Information and clear

all (if any) DTCs.

∙Select Diagnostic

Trouble Codes / Read

DTC Information,

'wiggle' SRS wiring

harness at all locations

between the SDM and

the left hand pre-

tensioner wiring

harness connector

YB209, while

monitoring TECH 2

screen display.

∙Does TECH 2 screen

display change status

from No Diagnostic

Trouble Codes?

Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

Fault not present.

Check all system

wiring harness

connectors, and

terminals.

Clear DTC and

recheck system.

3. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect the left

hand pre-tensioner

wiring harness

connector YB209.

∙Connect Tool No.

SD28280B to SRS

wiring harness

connector YB209.

∙Reconnect battery.

∙Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

∙Select Body / SRS /

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Read DTC

Information.

∙Is DTC 53 still

current?

Go to Step 4. Replace left hand

pre-tensioner

assembly, refer to

Section 1A7

SEAT AND SEAT

BELT

ASSEMBLIES.

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

4. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect SRS wiring

harness connector

YB207 (located next to

left hand front seat)

from left hand pre-

tensioner connector

harness.

∙Reconnect battery.

∙Using a suitable

jumper wire from KM-

609, bridge terminals

in connector YB207

together.

(NOTE: This step may

set a current DTC 54).

∙With TECH 2 still

connected, select

Body / SRS /

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Read DTC

Information.

∙Does DTC 53 become

history?

Replace SRS

connector

harness (harness

between left hand

pre-tensioner and

connector

YB207).

Clear all DTCs

and recheck

system to verify

repair.

Go to Step 5.

5. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect SDM

wiring harness

connector

YB189/YB190 from

the SDM.

∙Using Tool KM-609-

20, check wiring

between SDM wiring

harness connector

YB189/YB190,

terminal 1 and SRS

wiring harness

connector YB207,

circuit 351 (Blue/Black

wire) for open circuit

(refer to NOTE 1

above).

∙Is all OK?

Go to Step 6. Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

6. ∙With SDM wiring

harness connector

YB189/YB190

disconnected from the

SDM and using Tool

KM-609-20, check

wiring between SDM

wiring harness

connector

YB189/YB190,

terminal 2 and SRS

wiring harness

connector YB207,

circuit 352 (Red/Black

wire) for open (refer to

NOTE 1 above).

∙Is all OK?

Replace SDM,

refer to 2.7

SENSING AND

DIAGNOSTIC

MODULE in this

Section.

Recheck circuit to

verify repair.

Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

WHEN ALL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIRS A RE COMPLETED, ENSURE ALL SRS

COMPONENTS ARE RECONNECTED, CLEAR ALL DTC’S, ENABLE THE SRS AND

VERIFY CORRECT OPERATION

DTC 54 - LEFT HAND PRE-TENSIONER CIRCUIT RESISTANCE TOO LOW

Figure 12M-112

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

At ignition on, and on a constant monitoring cycle of every 500 milliseconds during the ignition cycle, the SDM

performs a system self check.

If the SDM detects a resistance in the left hand pre-tensioner circuit that is too low (less than 0.6 ohm) for longer

than 3 - 5 seconds, a current DTC 54 will set (refer TO 3.3 SRS SELF DIAGNOSTICS in this Section for more

details).

DTC 54 will set if circuits 351 or 352, (including the pre-tensioner assembly) are shorted together.

When DTC 54 sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS warning lamp and sets a current DTC 54. Should the fault

conditions detected by the SDM clear during the same ignition cycle, the current code will clear and become a

history DTC 54. The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

If a DTC 54 is set, the SRS warning lam p is illuminated on each ignition cycle, even if the DTC is set as a history

DTC, until the f ault conditions for setting DTC 54 ar e rectified and the DT C (c urrent or history) can then be cleared

from the SDM via TECH 2.

If DTC 54 is set, dependent on where the fault is, the passenger’s belt pre-tensioner may not operate.

TEST DESCRIPTION

The following number refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart:

1. Uses TECH 2 to check if DTC 54 is current or history.

2. Checks for intermittent fault by monitoring TECH 2 screen. If screen display changes during a wiring 'wiggle'

test, a fault with the wiring is at that location.

3. Tool SD28280B is a dum m y load taking the place of the left hand pr e-tensioner as sem bly. If DTC 54 becom es

a history DTC with dummy load connected, the system fault is in the left hand pre-tensioner assembly.

4. This test c heck s the wiring between the SDM wiring harness connec tor YB189 (8.1 SDM) or YB190 (8.0 SDM)

and SRS wiring harness connector YB209 for a short circuit.

NOTES ON DIAGNOSTIC CHART

1. For all wiring harness checking procedures, refer to Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS in this Service

Information CD.

2. Refer to 2.8 SRS WIRING REPAIR in Section 12M SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM - (VERSION

6.2) before conducting any SRS wiring harness repairs.

3. Resistance cannot be measured between the two terminals in connector YB209, as the in-built capacitor

blocks measurement. Therefore, a ‘service hole’ is incorporated into the connector for fault tracing. Refer to

1.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS, WIRING HARNESS in this Section for more details on this type of connector.

Figure 12M 113

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. ∙Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

∙Select Body / SRS /

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Read DTC

Information.

∙Is DTC 54 current?

Go to Step 3. Go to Step 2.

2. ∙With TECH 2 still

connected, select

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Clear DTC

Information and clear

all (if any) DTCs.

∙Select Diagnostic

Trouble Codes / Read

DTC Information,

'wiggle' SRS wiring

harness at all locations

between the SDM and

the left hand pre-

tensioner wiring

harness connector

YB209, while

monitoring TECH 2

screen display.

∙Does TECH 2 screen

display change status

from No Diagnostic

Trouble Codes?

Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

Fault not present.

Check all system

wiring harness

connectors, and

terminals.

Clear DTC and

recheck system.

3. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect the left

hand pre-tensioner

wiring harness

connector YB209.

∙Connect Tool No.

SD28280B to SRS

wiring harness

connector YB209.

∙Reconnect battery.

∙Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

∙Select Body / SRS /

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Read DTC

Information.

∙Is DTC 54 still

current?

Go to Step 4. Replace left hand

pre-tensioner

assembly, refer to

Section 1A7

SEAT AND SEAT

BELT

ASSEMBLIES.

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

4. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect SDM

wiring harness

connector

YB189/YB190 from

the SDM.

∙Disconnect Tool No.

SD28280B from SRS

wiring harness

connector YB209.

∙With SRS wiring

harness connector

YB209 disconnected,

and using Tool KM-

609-20, check for

continuity between

SDM wiring harness

connector YB189/

YB190, terminal 1,

circuit 351 (Blue/Black

wire) and terminal 2,

circuit 352 (Red/Black

wire) (refer to NOTES

1 and 3 above).

∙Does continuity exist?

Repair short in

circuits 351 and

352, between

SDM wiring

harness

connector

YB189/YB190 and

YB209 as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

Replace SDM,

refer to 2.4

SENSING AND

DIAGNOSTIC

MODULE (SDM)

in this Section.

Recheck circuit to

verify repair.

WHEN ALL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIRS A RE COMPLETED, ENSURE ALL SRS

COMPONENTS ARE RECONNECTED, CLEAR ALL DTC’S, ENABLE THE SRS AND

VERIFY CORRECT OPERATION

DTC 247 - LEFT HAND PRE-TENSIONER CIRCUIT POWER STAGE ERROR

T12M128

SDM

YB209

LEFT

HAND

PRE-TENSIONER

LEFT HAND

PRE-TENSIONER (+)

LEFT HAND

PRE-TENSIONER (-)

YB207

BLU/B (351)

R/B (352)

YB189

YB190

Figure 12M-114

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

At ignition on, the SDM perfor ms an initial system self check of the SDM power stages . If during this initial self test

the SDM detects a fault with the Left Hand Pre-Tensioner Circuit power stage a current DTC 247 Left Hand Pre-

Tens ioner Circuit Power Stage Er ror will set. On com pletion of the initial system s elf test the SDM then perf orms a

test of the Lef t Hand Pre-Tensioner Circuit. If the SDM detects a problem with this circuit the associated Left Hand

Pre-Tensioner Circuit DTC will be set and the DTC 247 Left Hand Pre-Tensioner Circuit Air Bag Circuit Power

Stage Error will become a history DTC.

DTC 247 Left Hand Pre-Tensioner Circuit Power Stage Error will set if a fault occurs in the Left Hand Pre-

Tensioner, connector YB209 with the in-built capacitor, connector YB207, the SRS wiring harness, connector

YB189/YB190 or SDM.

When a history DTC 247 Left Hand Pre-Tensioner Circuit Power Stage Error sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS

warning lamp. Should the fault conditions detected by the SDM clear during the same ignition cycle the code will

remain a history DTC 247 Left Hand Pre-Tensioner Circuit Power Stage Error for all ignition cycles until cleared.

The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

W hen a DTC 247 Left Hand Pre-Tensioner Circuit Power Stage Error sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS warning

lamp f or the rem ainder of the ignition c ycle. Should the fault c onditions detected by the SDM clear during the same

ignition cycle the code will remain a history DTC 247 Left Hand Pre-Tensioner Circuit Power Stage Error for all

ignition cycles until cleared. T he SRS warning lamp will also rem ain illum inated until the history DTC 247 Left Hand

Pre-Tensioner Circuit Power Stage Error is cleared.

If a DTC 247 Left Hand Pre-Tensioner Circuit Power Stage is set, dependent on where the fault is, the Left Hand

Pre-Tensioner may not operate.

ACTION REQUIRED

If DTC 247 Left Hand Pre-Tensioner Circuit Power Stage Error and any other DTC is set then the diagnostics for

the other DTC should be carried out first. For example if a DT C 247 Left Hand Pre-Tensioner Circuit Power Stage

Error and a DTC 53 Left Hand Pre-Tensioner Circuit Resistance High are set, the diagnostics for a DTC 53 Left

Hand Pre-Tensioner Circuit Resistance High should be carried out first.

If only a DTC 247 Left Hand Pre-Tensioner Circuit Power Stage Error is set then the SDM should be replaced.

NOTE: An intermittent in the Left Hand Pre-Tensioner Circuit may cause a DTC 247 Left Hand Pre-Tensioner

Power Stage Error to set.

After the fault has been rectified, ensure that all SRS components are reconnected, clear DTCs, enable the SRS

and verify the correct operation of the system (i.e. warning lamp not illuminated after five seconds of ignition being

switched ON).

NOTE: After the wiring harness has been replaced, the front seat should be put through its full adjustment

(forward/backwards, full recline and up and down) to ensure that the wiring harness does not foul with any of the

seat components.

TEST DESCRIPTION

The following numbers refer to Step numbers in the following diagnostic chart.

1. Uses T ECH 2 to check if a DTC 247 Left Hand Pr e-Tensioner Circ uit Power Stage Err or is history code, and if

any other Left Hand Pre-Tensioner Circuit current or history DTCs are set. If any other DTCs are set refer to

these DTCs first.

2. Checks for intermittent fault by monitoring TECH 2 screen during ignition on cycle. If screen display changes

during a wiring 'wiggle' test, a fault with the wiring is at that location.

3. If no other DTCs are set and there are no intermittents in the Left Hand Pre-Tensioner Circuit then the SDM

should be replaced.

NOTES ON DIAGNOSTIC CHART

1. For all wiring harness checking procedures, refer to VT Series 1 Service Information, WIRING DIAGRAMS,

SECTION 12P.

2. Refer to VT Series 1 Service Information Section 12M, SRS VERSION 6.2, 2.8 SRS WIRING REPAIR before

conducting any SRS wiring harness repairs.

T12M173

YB189

8.1 SDM

WIRING

HARNESS

CONNECTOR

BR/B (3 93)

50 25

BLU/B (351) R/B (352)

BR/W (353)

Y/R (354)

P/B (73 9 )

B (3 05)

G/W (1220)

W (3 4 7)

G (348)

Y/B (34 9 )

GY/ B (350)

Y/G (38 5 )

BR/G (386)

Y/W (387)

BR/W (388)

Y/BL U ( 3 92)

GY/ W (4 07)

LBLU (408)

BLU/B (351)

R/B (352)

BR/W (353)

Y/R (354)

P/B (739)

G/W (1220)

W (3 4 7)

G (348)

Y/B (349)

GY/ B (350)

YB190

8.0 SDM WIRING

HARNESS

CONNECTOR

YB207

SEAT B ELT

PRE-TENSI ONER HARN ESS

+VE-VE

(RIGHT HAND PRE-TENSIONER)

(LE FT HAND PRE-TENSI ONER)

BR/W (353)Y/R (354 ) Y/R (3 54) BR/W (353)

BLU/B (351)R/B (352) R/B (352) BLU/B (351)

CAP

ALSO -VE

YB209

SEAT BELT

PRE-TENSIONER

B (3 05)

Figure 12M-115

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. • Install TECH 2 to DLC.

• Select Body / SRS / Diagnostic Trouble Codes /

Read DTC Information.

• Is a DTC 247 Left Hand Pre-Tensioner Circuit

Power Stage Error a history DTC, and are any other

Left Hand Pre-Tensioner Circuit DTCs set?

Go to other Left

Hand Pre-

Tensioner Circuit

DTC diagnostic

chart in this

Section.

Go to Step 2.

2. • With TECH 2 still connected, select Diagnostic

Trouble Codes / Clear DTC Information and clear all

(if any) DTCs.

• Select Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC

Information, 'wiggle' SRS wiring harness at all

locations between the SDM and the left hand pre-

tensioner wiring harness connector YB209, while

monitoring TECH 2 screen display.

• Does TECH 2 screen display change status from

No Diagnostic Trouble Codes?

Go to applicable

DTC chart in this

Section.

Go to step 3.

3 • Replace SDM, refer to VT Series 1 Service

Information Section 12M, SRS VERSION 8.0 & 8.1,

2.4 SENSING AND DIAGNOSTIC MODULE (SDM).

Recheck circuit to verify repair.

WHEN ALL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIRS ARE COMPLETED, ENSURE ALL SRS COMPONENTS ARE

RECONNECTED, CLEAR ALL DTC’S, ENABLE THE SRS AND VERIFY CORRECT OPERATION

DTC 65 - RIGHT HAND PRE-TENSIONER CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

Figure 12M-116

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

At ignition on, and on a constant monitoring cycle of every 500 milliseconds during the ignition cycle, the SDM

perform s a system self check . If the SDM detects a resistance to battery supply is less than 5 kohms in either the

positive and/or negative circuit for more than 3 - 5 seconds, a current DTC 65 will set (refer to

3.3 SRS SELF DIAGNOSTICS in this Section for more details).

DTC 65 will set if circuits 353 (right hand pre-tensioner positive s ide) and/or 354 (right hand pre-tensioner negative

side) are shorted to battery +.

When DTC 65 sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS warning lamp and sets a current DTC 65. Should the fault

conditions detected by the SDM clear during the same ignition cycle, the current code will clear and become a

history DTC 65. The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

If a DTC 65 is set, the SRS warning lam p is illuminated on each ignition cycle, even if the DTC is set as a history

DTC, until the f ault conditions for setting DTC 65 ar e rectified and the DT C (c urrent or history) can then be cleared

from the SDM via TECH 2.

If DTC 65 is set, the SRS, including the right hand pre-tensioner, will still be operational.

TEST DESCRIPTION

The following number refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart:

1. Uses TECH 2 to check if DTC 65 is current or history.

2. Checks for intermittent fault by monitoring TECH 2 screen. If screen display changes during a wiring 'wiggle'

test, a fault with the wiring is at that location.

3. Checks circuits 353 and 354 for a short to battery +.

NOTES ON DIAGNOSTIC CHART

1. For all wiring harness checking procedures, refer to Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS in this Service

Information CD.

2. Refer to 2.8 SRS WIRING REPAIR in Section 12M SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM - (VERSION

6.2) before conducting any SRS wiring harness repairs.

3. Resistance cannot be measured between the two terminals in connector YB209, as the in-built capacitor

blocks measurement. Therefore, a ‘service hole’ is incorporated into the connector for fault tracing. Refer to

1.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS, WIRING HARNESS in this Section for more details on this type of connector.

4. W iring should be checked at point where TECH 2 screen display changed status. If necessary, split open the

harness.

5. If the fault can not be identified, the harness should be replaced.

Figure 12M-117

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. ∙Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

∙Select Body / SRS /

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Read DTC

Information.

∙Is DTC 65 current ?

Go to Step 3. Go to Step 2.

2. ∙With TECH 2 still

connected, select

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Clear DTC

Information and clear

all (if any) DTCs.

∙Select Diagnostic

Trouble Codes / Read

DTC Information,

'wiggle' SRS wiring

harness at all locations

between the SDM and

the left hand pre-

tensioner wiring

harness connector

YB209, while

monitoring TECH 2

screen display.

∙Does TECH 2 screen

display change status

from No Diagnostic

Trouble Codes?

Make repairs as

necessary (refer to

NOTES 2 & 4

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

Fault not present.

Check all system

wiring harness

connectors, and

terminals, ref er to

NOTE 5 above.

Clear DTC and

recheck system.

3. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect right hand

pre-tensioner wiring

harness connector

YB209 from pre-

tensioner.

∙Disconnect SDM wiring

harness connector

YB189/YB190 from the

SDM.

∙Reconnect battery.

∙Using Tool KM-609-20,

check wiring between

SDM wiring harness

connector

YB189/YB190,

terminals 3 and 4 and

right hand pre-tensioner

connector YB209,

circuits 353

(Brown/White wire) and

354 (Yellow/Red wire)

for short to battery +

(refer to NOTES 1 and

3 above).

∙Is all OK?

Replace SDM,

refer to 2.4

SENSING AND

DIAGNOSTIC

MODULE (SDM) in

this Section.

Recheck circuit to

verify repair.

Make repairs as

necessary (refer to

NOTE 2 above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

WHEN ALL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIRS ARE COMPLETED, ENSURE ALL SRS

COMPONENTS ARE RECONNECTED, CLEAR ALL DTC’S, ENABLE THE SRS AND

VERIFY CORRECT OPERATION

DTC 66 - RIGHT HAND PRE-TENSIONER CIRCUIT SHORT TO EARTH

Figure 12M-118

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

At ignition on, and on a constant monitoring cycle of every 500 milliseconds during the ignition cycle, the SDM

performs a s ystem s elf c heck. If the SDM detec ts a r es istanc e to earth of less than 3 k ohms in either the pos itive or

negative circuit for more than 3 - 5 seconds, a current DT C 66 will set (ref er to 3.3 SRS SELF DIAGNOST ICS in

this Section for more details).

DTC 66 will set if circuits 353 (right hand pre-tensioner positive s ide) and/or 354 (right hand pre-tensioner negative

side) are shorted to earth.

When DTC 66 sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS warning lamp and sets a current DTC 66. Should the fault

conditions detected by the SDM clear during the same ignition cycle, the current code will clear and become a

history DTC 66. The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

If a DTC 66 is set, the SRS warning lam p is illuminated on each ignition cycle, even if the DTC is set as a history

DTC, until the f ault conditions for setting DTC 66 ar e rectified and the DT C (c urrent or history) can then be cleared

from the SDM via TECH 2.

If DTC 66 is set, the SRS, including the right hand pre-tensioner, will still be operational.

TEST DESCRIPTION

The following number refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart:

1. Uses TECH 2 to determine if DTC 66 is current or history.

2. TECH 2 in this m ode should display approxim ately 1.6 - 6.4 ohm s if the right hand pre -tensioner loop circ uit is

OK.

3. If screen display changes during a wiring 'wiggle' test, a fault with the wiring is at that location.

4. Tool SD28280B is a dummy load taking the place of the pre-tensioner assembly. If TECH 2 displays the

correct resistance of the dummy load, the system fault is in the pre-tensioner assembly.

5. This test check s the wiring between the SDM wiring harness c onnector YB189 (8.1 SDM) or YB190 (8.0 SDM),

terminal 3 and the right hand pre-tensioner connector YB209 for faults.

6. This test check s the wiring between the SDM wiring harness c onnector YB189 (8.1 SDM) or YB190 (8.0 SDM),

terminal 4 and the right hand pre-tensioner connector YB209 for faults.

NOTES ON DIAGNOSTIC CHART

1. For all wiring harness checking procedures, refer to Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS in this Service

Information CD.

2. Refer to 2.8 SRS WIRING REPAIR in Section 12M SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM - (VERSION

6.2) before conducting any SRS wiring harness repairs.

3. Refer to Section 12N FUSES & WIRING HARNESSES in this Service Information CD f or SRS wiring harnes s

routing.

4. Resistance cannot be measur ed between the two term inals in connec tor YB209 as the in-built c apacitor block s

measurement. Therefore, a ‘service hole’ is incorporated into the connector for fault tracing. Refer to

1.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS, WIRING HARNESS in this Section for more details on this type of connector.

5. Wiring should be checked at point where TECH 2 screen display changed. If necessary, split open wiring

harness.

6. If fault cannot be identified, the wiring harness should be replaced.

Figure 12M-119

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. ∙Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

∙Select Body / SRS /

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Read DTC

Information.

∙Does TECH 2 display

DTC 66 as a Current

DTC?

Go to Step 2. Go to Step 3.

2. ∙With TECH 2 still

connected to DLC,

select Body / SRS /

Data Display and

scroll to RIGHT HAND

PRE-TENSIONER

LOOP RESISTANCE.

∙Is the resistance value

displayed on TECH 2

as specified?

Approx.

1.6 - 6.4

Ohms

Go to Step 3. Go to Step 4.

3. ∙With TECH 2 still

connected, select

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Clear DTC

Information and clear

all (if any) DTCs.

∙Select Diagnostic

Trouble Codes / Read

DTC Information,

'wiggle' SRS wiring

harness at all locations

between the SDM and

the pre-tensioner while

monitoring TECH 2

screen display.

∙Does TECH 2 screen

display change status

from No Diagnostic

Trouble Codes?

Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTES 2 & 5

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

Fault not present.

Check all system

wiring harness

connectors, and

terminals (refer to

NOTE 6 above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system.

4. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect right hand

pre-tensioner wiring

harness connector

YB209 from pre-

tensioner.

∙Connect Tool No.

SD28280B to SRS

wiring harness

connector YB209.

∙Reconnect battery.

∙With TECH 2 still

connected, select

Body / SRS / Data

Display and scroll to

RIGHT HAND PRE-

TENSIONER LOOP

RESISTANCE.

∙Is the resistance value

displayed on TECH 2

as specified?

Approx.

3.0

Ohms

Replace right

hand pre-

tensioner

assembly, refer to

Section 1A7

SEAT AND SEAT

BELT

ASSEMBLIES.

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

Go to Step 5.

5. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect SDM

wiring harness

connector

YB189/YB190 from

the SDM.

∙Remove Tool

SD28280B from

YB209.

∙Using Tool KM-609-

20, check wiring

between SDM wiring

harness connector

YB189/YB190,

terminal 3 and right

hand pre-tensioner

connector YB209,

circuit 353

(Brown/White wire) for

short to earth (refer to

NOTE 1 above).

∙Is all OK?

Go to Step 6. Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

6. ∙With SDM wiring

harness connector

YB189/YB190

disconnected from the

SDM and using Tool

KM-609-20, check

wiring between SDM

wiring harness

connector

YB189/YB190,

terminal 4 and right

hand pre-tensioner

connector YB209,

circuit 354

(Yellow/Red wire) for a

short to earth (refer to

NOTES 1 and 4

above).

∙Is all OK?

Replace SDM,

refer to 2.7

SENSING AND

DIAGNOSTIC

MODULE in this

Section.

Recheck circuit to

verify repair.

Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

WHEN ALL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIRS A RE COMPLETED, ENSURE ALL SRS

COMPONENTS ARE RECONNECTED, CLEAR ALL DTC’S, ENABLE THE SRS AND

VERIFY CORRECT OPERATION

DTC 67 - RIGHT HAND PRE-TENSIONER CIRCUIT CAPACITANCE TOO HIGH

Figure 12M-120

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

At ignition on, and on a constant monitoring cycle of every 500 milliseconds during the ignition cycle, the SDM

performs a system self check.

If the SDM detects the capacitance in the right hand pre-tens ioner cir cuit is too high ( greater than 550 nF) f or longer

than 3 - 5 seconds, a current DTC 67 will set (refer to 3.3 SRS SELF DIAGNOSTICS in this Section for more

details).

DTC 67 will set if the in-built capacitor in the SRS wiring harness connector YB209 is faulty.

When DTC 67 sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS warning lamp and sets a current DTC 67. Should the fault

conditions detected by the SDM clear during the same ignition cycle, the current code will clear and become a

history DTC 67. The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

If a DTC 67 is set, the SRS warning lam p is illuminated on each ignition cycle, even if the DTC is set as a history

DTC, until the f ault conditions for setting DTC 67 ar e rectified and the DT C (c urrent or history) can then be cleared

from the SDM via TECH 2.

ACTION REQUIRED

If DT C 67 is set, the r ight hand pre-tensioner m ay not operate and therefore, the SRS pre-tens ioner wiring harness,

with connector YB209 (between right hand pre-tensioner and SRS connector YB207) must be replaced.

NOTE:

Before r emoving the SRS pr e-tensioner wiring harness, tak e note of wiring harness r outing and how it is retained to

the front seat.

After the SRS pre-tensioner wiring harness, between the pre-tensioner and SRS wiring harness connector YB207

has been replaced, ensure that all SRS components are reconnected, clear DTCs, enable the SRS and verify the

correct operation of the system (i.e. warning lamp not illuminated after five seconds of ignition being switched ON).

NOTE:

After the wiring harness has been replaced, the front seat should be put through its full adjustment

(forward/backwards, full recline and up and down) to ensure that the wiring harness does not foul with any of the

seat components.

DTC 68 - RIGHT HAND PRE-TENSIONER CIRCUIT CAPACITANCE TOO LOW

Figure 12M-121

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

At ignition on, and on a constant monitoring cycle of every 500 milliseconds during the ignition cycle, the SDM

performs a system self check.

If the SDM detects the capacitance in the right hand pre-tensioner circuit is too low (less than 390 nF) for longer

than 3 - 5 seconds, a current DTC 68 will set (refer to 3.3 SRS SELF DIAGNOSTICS in this Section for more

details).

DTC 68 will set if the in-built capacitor in the SRS wiring harness connector YB209 is faulty.

When DTC 68 sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS warning lamp and sets a current DTC 68. Should the fault

conditions detected by the SDM clear during the same ignition cycle, the current code will clear and become a

history DTC 68. The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

If a DTC 68 is set, the SRS warning lam p is illuminated on each ignition cycle, even if the DTC is set as a history

DTC, until the f ault conditions for setting DTC 68 ar e rectified and the DT C (c urrent or history) can then be cleared

from the SDM via TECH 2.

ACTION REQUIRED

If DT C 68 is set, the r ight hand pre-tensioner m ay not operate and therefore, the SRS pre-tens ioner wiring harness,

with connector YB209 (between right hand pre-tensioner and SRS connector YB207) must be replaced.

NOTE:

Before r emoving the SRS pr e-tensioner wiring harness, tak e note of wiring harness r outing and how it is retained to

the front seat.

After the SRS pre-tensioner wiring harness, between the pre-tensioner and SRS wiring harness connector YB207

has been replaced, ensure that all SRS components are reconnected, clear DTCs, enable the SRS and verify the

correct operation of the system (i.e. warning lamp not illuminated after five seconds of ignition being switched ON).

NOTE:

After the wiring harness has been replaced, the front seat should be put through its full adjustment

(forward/backwards, full recline and up and down) to ensure that the wiring harness does not foul with any of the

seat components.

DTC 69 - RIGHT HAND PRE-TENSIONER CIRCUIT RESISTANCE TOO HIGH

Figure 12M-122

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

At ignition on, and on a constant monitoring cycle of every 500 milliseconds during the ignition cycle, the SDM

performs a system self check.

If the SDM detects a resistance in the right hand pre-tensioner circuit that is too high (greater than 8.4 ohm) for

longer than 3 - 5 seconds, a current DTC 69 will set (refer to 3.3 SRS SELF DIAGNOSTICS in this Section for

more details).

DTC 69 will set if circuits 353 or 354 (including the right hand pre-tensioner assembly) are open circuit.

When DTC 69 sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS warning lamp and sets a cur rent DTC. Should the f ault conditions

detected by the SDM clear during the same ignition c ycle, the cur rent code will clear and bec om e a history DTC 69.

The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

If a DTC is set, the SRS warning lam p is illuminated on each ignition c ycle, even if the DTC is set as a history DTC,

until the fault conditions for setting DTC 69 are rectified and the DTC (current or history) can then be cleared from

the SDM via TECH 2.

If DTC 69 is set, dependent on where the fault is, the right hand pre-tensioner may not operate.

TEST DESCRIPTION

The following number refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart:

1. Uses TECH 2 to check if DTC 69 is current or history.

2. Checks for intermittent fault by monitoring TECH 2 screen. If screen display changes during a wiring 'wiggle'

test, a fault with the wiring is at that location.

3. Tool SD28280B is a dummy load taking the place of the right hand pre-tensioner assembly. If DTC 69

becomes a history DTC with dummy load connected, the system fault is in the right hand pre-tensioner

assembly.

4. Checks if open circuit is in the SRS connector harness. If connector YB207 is disconnected and it’s term inals

are bridged together, DTC 69 will become a history DTC if this connector harness is faulty.

5. Checks circuit 353 for open circuit.

6. Checks circuit 354 for open circuit.

NOTES ON DIAGNOSTIC CHART

1. For all wiring harness checking procedures, refer to Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS in this Service

Information CD.

2. Refer to 2.8 SRS WIRING REPAIR in Section 12M SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM - (VERSION

6.2) before conducting any SRS wiring harness repairs.

Figure 12M-123

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. ∙Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

∙Select Body / SRS /

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Read DTC

Information.

∙Is DTC 69 current?

Go to Step 3. Go to Step 2.

2. ∙With TECH 2 still

connected, select

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Clear DTC

Information and clear all

(if any) DTCs.

∙Select Diagnostic

Trouble Codes / Read

DTC Information,

'wiggle' SRS wiring

harness at all locations

between the SDM and

the right hand pre-

tensioner wiring

harness connector

YB209, w hile monitoring

TECH 2 screen display.

∙Does TECH 2 screen

display change status

from No Diagnostic

Trouble Codes?

Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

Fault not present.

Check all system

wiring harness

connectors, and

terminals.

Clear DTC and

recheck system.

3. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect the right

hand pre-tensioner

wiring harness

connector YB209.

∙Connect Tool No.

SD28280B to SRS

wiring harness

connector YB209.

∙Reconnect battery.

∙Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

∙Select Body / SRS /

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Read DTC

Information.

∙Is DTC 69 still current?

Go to Step 4. Replace right

hand pre-

tensioner

assembly, refer to

Section 1A7

SEAT AND SEAT

BELT

ASSEMBLIES.

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

4. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect SRS wiring

harness connector

YB207 (located next to

right hand front seat)

from right hand pre-

tensioner connector

harness.

∙Reconnect battery.

∙Using a suitable jumper

wire from KM-609,

bridge terminals in

connector YB207

together.

(NOTE: This step may

set a current DTC 70).

∙With TECH 2 still

connected, select Body

/ SRS / Diagnostic

Trouble Codes / Read

DTC Information.

∙Does DTC 69 become

history?

Replace SRS

connector

harness (harness

between right

hand pre-

tensioner and

connector

YB207).

Clear all DTCs

and recheck

system to verify

repair.

Go to Step 5.

5. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect SDM wiring

harness connector

YB189/YB190 from the

SDM.

∙Using Tool KM-609-20,

check wiring between

SDM wiring harness

connector

YB189/YB190, terminal

3 and SRS wiring

harness connector

YB207, circuit 353

(Brown/White wire) for

open circuit (refer to

NOTE 1 above).

∙Is all OK?

Go to Step 6. Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

6. ∙With SDM wiring

harness connector

YB189/YB190

disconnected from the

SDM and using Tool

KM-609-20, check

wiring between SDM

wiring harness

connector

YB189/YB190, terminal

4 and SRS wiring

harness connector

YB207, circuit 354

(Yellow / Red wire) for

open (refer to NOTE 1

above).

∙Is all OK?

Replace SDM,

refer to 2.7

SENSING AND

DIAGNOSTIC

MODULE in this

Section.

Recheck circuit to

verify repair.

Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

WHEN ALL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIRS A RE COMPLETED, ENSURE ALL SRS

COMPONENTS ARE RECONNECTED, CLEAR ALL DTC’S, ENABLE THE SRS AND

VERIFY CORRECT OPERATION

DTC 70 - RIGHT HAND PRE-TENSIONER CIRCUIT RESISTANCE TOO LOW

Figure 12M-124

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

At ignition on, and on a constant monitoring cycle of every 500 milliseconds during the ignition cycle, the SDM

performs a system self check.

If the SDM detects a resistance in the right hand pre-tensioner circuit that is too low (less than 0.6 ohm) for longer

than 3 - 5 seconds, a current DTC 70 will set (refer to 3.3 SRS SELF DIAGNOSTICS in this Section for more

details).

DTC 70 will set if circuit 353 or 354, (including the pre-tensioner assembly) is shorted together.

When DTC 70 sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS warning lamp and sets a current DTC 70. Should the fault

conditions detected by the SDM clear during the same ignition cycle, the current code will clear and become a

history DTC 70. The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

If a DTC 70 is set, the SRS warning lam p is illuminated on each ignition cycle, even if the DTC is set as a history

DTC, until the f ault conditions for setting DTC 70 ar e rectified and the DT C (c urrent or history) can then be cleared

from the SDM via TECH 2.

If DTC 70 is set, dependent on where the fault is, the right hand belt pre-tensioner may not operate.

TEST DESCRIPTION

The following number refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart:

1. Uses TECH 2 to check if DTC 70 is current or history.

2. Checks for intermittent fault by monitoring TECH 2 screen. If screen display changes during a wiring 'wiggle'

test, a fault with the wiring is at that location.

3. Tool SD28280B is a dummy load taking the place of the right hand pre-tensioner assembly. If DTC 70

becomes a history DTC with dummy load connected, the system fault is in the right hand pre-tensioner

assembly.

4. This test c heck s the wiring between the SDM wiring harness connec tor YB189 (8.1 SDM) or YB190 (8.0 SDM)

and SRS wiring harness connector YB209 for a short circuit..

NOTES ON DIAGNOSTIC CHART

1. For all wiring harness checking procedures, refer to Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS in this Service

Information CD.

2. Refer to 2.8 SRS WIRING REPAIR in Section 12M SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM - (VERSION

6.2) before conducting any SRS wiring harness repairs.

3. Resistance cannot be measured between the two terminals in connector YB209, as the in-built capacitor

blocks measurement. Therefore, a ‘service hole’ is incorporated into the connector for fault tracing. Refer to

1.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS, WIRING HARNESS in this Section for more details on this type of connector.

Figure 12M-125

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. ∙Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

∙Select Body / SRS /

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Read DTC

Information.

∙Is DTC 70 current?

Go to Step 3. Go to Step 2.

2. ∙With TECH 2 still

connected, select

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Clear DTC

Information and clear

all (if any) DTCs.

∙Select Diagnostic

Trouble Codes / Read

DTC Information,

'wiggle' SRS wiring

harness at all locations

between the SDM and

the right hand pre-

tensioner wiring

harness connector

YB209, while

monitoring TECH 2

screen display.

∙Does TECH 2 screen

display change status

from No Diagnostic

Trouble Codes?

Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

Fault not present.

Check all system

wiring harness

connectors, and

terminals.

Clear DTC and

recheck system.

3. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect the right

hand pre-tensioner

wiring harness

connector YB209.

∙Connect Tool No.

SD28280B to SRS

wiring harness

connector YB209.

∙Reconnect battery.

∙Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

∙Select Body / SRS /

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Read DTC

Information.

∙Is DTC 70 still

current?

Go to Step 4. Replace right

hand pre-

tensioner

assembly, refer to

Section 1A7

SEAT AND SEAT

BELT

ASSEMBLIES.

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

4. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect SDM

wiring harness

connector

YB189/YB190 from

the SDM.

∙Disconnect Tool No.

SD28280B from SRS

wiring harness

connector YB209.

∙With SRS wiring

harness connector

YB209 disconnected,

and using Tool KM-

609-20, check for

continuity between

SDM wiring harness

connector YB189/

YB190, terminal 3,

circuit 353 (Brown/

White wire) and

terminal 4, circuit 354

(Yellow/Red wire)

(refer to NOTES 1 and

3 above).

∙Does continuity exist?

Repair short in

circuits 353 and

354, between

SDM wiring

harness

connector

YB189/YB190 and

YB209 as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

Replace SDM,

refer to 2.4

SENSING AND

DIAGNOSTIC

MODULE (SDM)

in this Section.

Recheck circuit to

verify repair.

WHEN ALL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIRS A RE COMPLETED, ENSURE ALL SRS

COMPONENTS ARE RECONNECTED, CLEAR ALL DTC’S, ENABLE THE SRS AND

VERIFY CORRECT OPERATION

DTC 247 - RIGHT HAND PRE-TENSIONER CIRCUIT POWER STAGE ERROR

T12M129

SDM

YB189

YB190

YB209

RIGHT

HAND

PRE-TENSIONER

RIGHT HAND

PRE-TENSIONER (+)

RIGHT HAND

PRE-TENSIONER (-)

YB207

BR/W (353)

Y/R (354)

Figure 12M-126

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

At ignition on, the SDM perfor ms an initial system self check of the SDM power stages . If during this initial self test

the SDM detec ts a f ault with the Right Hand Pre-Tens ioner Circ uit power stage a curr ent DTC 247 Right Hand Pr e-

Tens ioner Circuit Power Stage Er ror will set. On com pletion of the initial system s elf test the SDM then perf orms a

test of the Right Hand Pre-Tensioner Circuit. If the SDM detects a problem with this circuit the associated Right

Hand Pre-Tensioner Circuit DTC will be set and the DTC 247 Right Hand Pre-Tensioner Circuit Air Bag Circuit

Power Stage Error will become a history DTC.

DTC 247 Right Hand Pre-Tensioner Circuit Power Stage Error will set if a fault occurs in the Right Hand Pre-

Tensioner, connector YB209 with the in-built capacitor, connector YB207, the SRS wiring harness, connector

YB189/190 or SDM.

W hen a history DTC 247 Right Hand Pre-Tensioner Circuit Power Stage Error sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS

warning lamp. Should the fault conditions detected by the SDM clear during the same ignition cycle the code will

remain a history DTC 247 Right Hand Pre-Tensioner Circuit Power Stage Error for all ignition cycles until cleared.

The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

W hen a DT C 247 Right Hand Pre- Tensioner Circuit Power Stage Error s ets, the SDM illum inates the SRS warning

lamp f or the rem ainder of the ignition c ycle. Should the fault c onditions detected by the SDM clear during the same

ignition cycle the code will remain a history DTC 247 Right Hand Pre-Tensioner Circuit Power Stage Error for all

ignition cycles until cleared. The SRS warning lamp will also remain illuminated until the history DTC 247 Right

Hand Pre-Tensioner Circuit Power Stage Error is cleared.

If a DT C 247 Right Hand Pr e-Tensioner Circ uit Power Stage is s et, dependent on where the f ault is , the Right Hand

Pre-Tensioner may not operate.

ACTION REQUIRED

If DTC 247 Right Hand Pre-Tensioner Circuit Power Stage Error and any other DTC is set then the diagnos tics for

the other DTC s hould be carr ied out firs t. For exam ple if a DT C 247 Right Hand Pre-T ensioner Circuit Power Stage

Error and a DT C 69 Right Hand Pre-T ensioner Circuit Res istance High are set, the diagnos tics for a DTC 69 Right

Hand Pre-Tensioner Circuit Resistance High should be carried out first.

If only a DTC 247 Right Hand Pre-Tensioner Circuit Power Stage Error is set then the SDM should be replaced.

NOTE: An intermittent in the Right Hand Pre-Tensioner Circuit may cause a DTC 247 Right Hand Pre-Tensioner

Circuit Power Stage Error to set.

After the fault has been rectified, ensure that all SRS components are reconnected, clear DTCs, enable the SRS

and verify the correct operation of the system (i.e. warning lamp not illuminated after five seconds of ignition being

switched ON).

NOTE: After the wiring harness has been replaced, the front seat should be put through its full adjustment

(forward/backwards, full recline and up and down) to ensure that the wiring harness does not foul with any of the

seat components.

TEST DESCRIPTION

The following numbers refer to Step numbers in the following diagnostic chart.

1. Uses T ECH 2 to c heck if a DTC 247 Right Hand Pre-Tensioner Circ uit Power Stage Err or is his tor y code, and if

any other Right Hand Pre-T ensioner Circuit current or history DTCs are set. If any other DTCs are set refer to

these DTCs first.

2. Checks for intermittent fault by monitoring TECH 2 screen during ignition on cycle. If screen display changes

during a wiring 'wiggle' test, a fault with the wiring is at that location.

3. If no other DTCs are set and there are no intermittents in the Right Hand Pre-Tensioner Circuit then the SDM

should be replaced.

NOTES ON DIAGNOSTIC CHART

1. For all wiring harness checking procedures, refer to VT Series 1 Service Information, WIRING DIAGRAMS,

SECTION 12P.

2. Refer to VT Series 1 Service Information Section 12M, SRS VERSION 6.2, 2.8 SRS WIRING REPAIR before

conducting any SRS wiring harness repairs.

T12M168

YB190

8.0 SDM WIRING

HARNESS

CONNECTOR

+VE-VE

Y/R (354)

R/B (352)

(RIGHT HAND PRE-TENSIONER)

(SERVICE

HOLE)

(LE FT HAND PRE-TENSION ER)

BR/W (353)

BLU/B (351)

CAP ALSO -VE

YB209

SEAT BELT

PRE-TENSIONER

HARNESS

CONNECTOR

YB189

8.1 SDM WIRING

HARNESS

CONNECTOR

BR/B (3 93)

50 25

BLU/B (351) R/B (352)

BR/W (353)

Y/R (354)

P/B (739)

B (3 05)

G/W (1220)

W (3 47 )

G (348)

Y/B (349)

GY/B (350)

Y/G (38 5)

BR/G (386)

Y/W (387)

BR/W (388)

Y/BL U ( 3 92)

GY/W (407)

LBLU (408)

BLU/B (351)

R/B (352)

BR/W (353)

Y/R (354)

P/B (739 )

G/W (1220)

W (3 47 )

G (348)

Y/B (349)

GY/B (350)

Figure 12M-127

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. • Install TECH 2 to DLC.

• Select Body / SRS / Diagnostic Trouble Codes /

Read DTC Information.

• Is a DTC 247 Right Hand Pre-Tensioner Circuit

Power Stage Error a history DTC, and are any other

Right Hand Pre-Tensioner Circuit DTCs set?

Go to other Right

Hand Pre-

Tensioner Circuit

DTC diagnostic

chart in this

Section.

Go to Step 2.

2. • With TECH 2 still connected, select Diagnostic

Trouble Codes / Clear DTC Information and clear all

(if any) DTCs.

• Select Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC

Information, 'wiggle' SRS wiring harness at all

locations between the SDM and the right hand pre-

tensioner wiring harness connector YB209, while

monitoring TECH 2 screen display.

• Does TECH 2 screen display change status from

No Diagnostic Trouble Codes?

Go to applicable

DTC chart in this

Section.

Go to step 3.

3 • Replace SDM, refer to VT Series 1 Service

Information Section 12M, SRS VERSION 8.0 & 8.1,

2.4 SENSING AND DIAGNOSTIC MODULE (SDM).

Recheck circuit to verify repair.

WHEN ALL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIRS ARE COMPLETED, ENSURE ALL SRS COMPONENTS ARE

RECONNECTED, CLEAR ALL DTC’S, ENABLE THE SRS AND VERIFY CORRECT OPERATION

DTC 81 - LEFT HAND SIDE AIR BAG CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

Figure 12M-128

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

At ignition on, and on a constant monitoring cycle of every 500 milliseconds during the ignition cycle, the SDM

performs a system self check.

If the SDM detects a resistance to battery supply is less than 5 k ohms in either the positive and/or negative circuit

for more than 3 - 5 seconds, a current DTC 81 will set (refer 3.3 SRS SELF DIAGNOSTICS in this Section for

more details).

DTC 81 will set if circuits 385 (side air bag positive side) and/or 386 (side air bag negative side) are shorted to

battery +.

When DTC 81 sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS warning lamp and sets a current DTC 81. Should the fault

conditions detected by the SDM clear during the same ignition cycle, the current code will clear and become a

history DTC 81. The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

If a DTC 81 is set, the SRS warning lam p is illuminated on each ignition cycle, even if the DTC is set as a history

DTC, until the f ault conditions for setting DTC 81 ar e rectified and the DT C (c urrent or history) can then be cleared

from the SDM via TECH 2.

If DTC 81 is set, the SRS, including the left hand side air bag, may still be operational.

TEST DESCRIPTION

The following number refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart:

1. Uses TECH 2 to check if DTC 81 is current or history.

2. Checks for intermittent fault by monitoring TECH 2 screen. If screen display changes during a wiring 'wiggle'

test, a fault with the wiring is at that location.

3. Tool AU485 is a dumm y load taking the place of the lef t hand side air bag inflator m odule as sem bly. If DTC 81

becomes a history DTC with dummy load connected, the system fault is in the side air bag inflator module

assembly (or the ‘pigtail’ wiring harness that connects to the side air bag module).

4. Checks circuit 385 and 386 for short to battery +.

NOTES ON DIAGNOSTIC CHART

1. For all wiring harness checking procedures, refer to Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS in this Service

Information CD.

2. Refer to 2.7 SRS WIRING REPAIR in this Section before conducting any SRS wiring harness repairs.

3. Due to the design of the anti-back-out connector on the side air bag module assembly, connector YB201 can

not be disconnected from the side air bag module assembly without damaging the assembly. Therefore,

repairs to the SRS ‘pigtail’ wiring harness that run through the f ront seat are not to be attem pted. If this ‘pigtail’

harness is damaged in any way, the harness and side air bag module assembly must be replaced as an

assembly.

Figure 12M-129

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. ∙Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

∙Select Body / SRS /

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Read DTC

Information.

∙Is DTC 81 current?

Go to Step 3. Go to Step 2.

2. ∙With TECH 2 still

connected, select

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Clear DTC

Information and clear

all (if any) DTCs.

∙Select Diagnostic

Trouble Codes / Read

DTC Information and

monitor the TECH 2

screen display to see if

it changes status while

performing the

following:

Put left hand front seat

through it’s full

adjustment (forward /

backward, up / down

and full recline).

'Wiggle' SRS wiring

harness at all

accessible locations

between the SDM and

the side air bag wiring

harness connector

YB205.

∙Does TECH 2 screen

display change status

from No Diagnostic

Trouble Codes?

Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTES 2 & 3

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

Fault not present.

Check all system

wiring harness

connectors, and

terminals.

Clear DTC and

recheck system.

3. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect SRS wiring

harness connector

YB205 (located next to

the left hand front

seat) from the left

hand side air bag

inflator module ‘pigtail’

harness.

∙Connect Tool No.

AU485 to SRS wiring

harness connector

YB205.

∙Reconnect battery.

∙Connect TECH 2 to

DLC and select: Body

/ SRS / Diagnostic

Trouble Codes / Read

DTC Information.

∙Is DTC 81 still

current?

Go to Step 4. Replace left hand

side air bag and

‘‘pigtail’’ wiring

harness

assembly, refer

2.3 SIDE AIR

BAG MODULE

ASSEMBLY in

this Section

(refer to NOTE 3

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

4. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect SDM

wiring harness

connector YB189 from

the SDM.

∙Reconnect battery.

∙Using Tool KM-609-

20, check wiring

between SDM wiring

harness connector

YB189, terminals 16

and 17 and SRS

connector YB205,

circuits 385

(Yellow/Green wire)

and 386 (Brown/Green

wire) for short to

battery + (refer to

NOTE 1 above).

∙Is all OK?

Replace SDM,

refer to 2.7

SENSING AND

DIAGNOSTIC

MODULE in this

Section.

Recheck circuit to

verify repair.

Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

WHEN ALL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIRS A RE COMPLETED, ENSURE ALL SRS

COMPONENTS ARE RECONNECTED, CLEAR ALL DTC’S, ENABLE THE SRS AND

VERIFY CORRECT OPERATION

DTC 82 - LEFT HAND SIDE AIR BAG CIRCUIT SHORT TO EARTH

Figure 12M-130

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

At ignition on, and on a constant monitoring cycle of every 500 milliseconds during the ignition cycle, the SDM

performs a s ystem s elf c heck. If the SDM detec ts a r es istanc e to earth of less than 3 k ohms in either the pos itive or

negative inflator circuit for more than 3 - 5 seconds, a current DTC 82 will set (refer to

3.3 SRS SELF DIAGNOSTICS in this Section for more details).

DTC 82 will set if circuits 385 (side air bag positive side) and/or 386 (side air bag negative side) are shorted to

earth.

When DTC 82 sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS warning lamp and sets a current DTC 82. Should the fault

conditions detected by the SDM clear during the same ignition cycle, the current code will clear and become a

history DTC 82. The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

If a DTC 82 is set, the SRS warning lam p is illuminated on each ignition cycle, even if the DTC is set as a history

DTC, until the f ault conditions for setting DTC 82 ar e rectified and the DT C (c urrent or history) can then be cleared

from the SDM via TECH 2.

If DTC 82 is set, the SRS, including the left hand side air bag, may still be operational.

TEST DESCRIPTION

The following number refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart:

1. Uses TECH 2 to check if DTC 82 is current or history.

2. TECH 2 in this mode should display approximately 1.6 - 6.4 ohms if the passenger’s air bag loop circuit is OK.

3. If screen display changes during a wiring 'wiggle' test, a fault with the wiring is at that location.

4. Tool AU485 is a dummy load taking the place of the side air bag inflator module. If TECH 2 displays the correct

resistance of the dummy load, the system fault is in the side air bag inflator module assembly (or the ‘pigtail’

wiring harness that connects to the side air bag module).

6. This test checks the wiring between the SDM wiring harness connector YB189, terminal 16 and the left hand

side air bag inflator module connector YB205 for faults.

7. This test checks the wiring between the SDM wiring harness connector YB189, terminal 17 and the left hand

side air bag inflator module connector YB205 for faults.

NOTES ON DIAGNOSTIC CHART

1. For all wiring harness checking procedures, refer to Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS in this Service

Information CD.

2. Refer to 2.7 WIRING REPA IR in this Section before conducting any SRS wiring harness repairs.

3. Due to the design of the anti-back-out connector on the side air bag module assembly, connector YB201 can

not be disconnected from the side air bag module assembly without damaging the assembly. Therefore,

repairs to the SRS ‘pigtail’ wiring harness that runs through the front seat are not to be attempted. If this ‘pigtail’

harness is damaged in any way, the harness and side air bag module assembly must be replaced as an

assembly.

4. Wiring should be checked at point where TECH 2 screen display changed status. If necessary, split open

wiring harness.

Figure 12M-131

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. ∙Connect TECH 2 to DLC.

∙Select Body / SRS /

Diagnostic Trouble Codes

/ Read DTC Information.

∙Does TECH 2 display

DTC 82 as a Current

DTC?

Go to Step 2. Go to Step 3.

2. ∙With TECH 2 still

connected to DLC, select

Body / SRS / Data Display

and scroll to LEFT HAND

SIDE AIR BAG LOOP

RESISTANCE.

∙Is the resistanc e value

displayed on TECH 2 as

specified?

Approx.

1.6 - 6.4

Ohms

Go to Step 3. Go to Step 4.

3. ∙With TECH 2 still

connected, select

Diagnostic Trouble Codes

/ Clear DTC Information

and clear all (if any) DTCs.

∙Select Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Read DTC

Information and monitor

the TECH 2 screen

display to see if it changes

status while performing

the following:

Put left hand front seat

through it’s full adjustment

(forward / backward, up /

down and full recline).

'Wiggle' SRS wiring

harness at all accessible

locations between the

SDM and the side air bag

wiring harness connector

YB205.

∙Does TECH 2 screen

display change status

from No Diagnostic

Trouble Codes?

Make repairs as

necessary (refer

NOTES 2, 3 & 4

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

Fault not present.

Check all system

wiring harness

connectors, and

terminals.

Clear DTC and

recheck system.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

4. ∙Disable the SRS, refer to

2.2 SYSTEM DISABLING

AND ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect SRS wiring

harness connector YB205

(located next to the left

hand front seat) from the

left hand side air bag

inflator module ‘pigtail’

harness.

∙Connect Tool No. AU485

to SRS wiring harness

connector YB205.

∙Reconnect battery.

∙Connect TECH 2 to DLC

and select Body / SRS /

Data Display and scroll to

LEFT HAND SIDE AIR

BAG LOOP

RESISTANCE.

∙Is the resistanc e value

displayed on TECH 2 as

specified?

Approx.

2.0

Ohms

Replace left hand

side air bag inflator

module and ‘pigtail’

wiring harness

assembly, refer to

2.3 SIDE AIR BAG

MODULE

ASSEMBLY in this

Section

(refer to NOTE 3

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

Go to Step 5.

5. ∙Disable the SRS, refer to

2.2 SYSTEM DISABLING

AND ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect SDM wiring

harness connector YB189

from the SDM.

∙Remove Tool AU485 from

YB205.

∙Using Tool KM-609-20,

check wiring between

SDM wiring harness

connector YB189, terminal

16 and SRS connector

YB205, circuit 385

(Yellow/Green wire) for

short to earth (refer NOTE

1 above).

∙Is all OK?

Go to Step 7. Make repairs as

necessary (refer to

NOTE 2 above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

6. ∙With SDM wiring harness

connector YB189

disconnected from the

SDM and using Tool KM-

609-20, check wiring

between SDM wiring

harness connector YB189,

terminal 17 and SRS

connector YB205, circuit

386 (Brown/ Green wire)

for a short to earth (refer

to NOTE 1 above).

∙Is all OK?

Replace SDM,

refer to 2.7

SENSING AND

DIAGNOSTIC

MODULE in this

Section.

Recheck circuit to

verify repair.

Make repairs as

necessary (refer to

NOTE 2 above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

WHEN ALL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIRS ARE COMPLETED, ENSURE ALL SRS

COMPONENTS ARE RECONNECTED, CLEAR ALL DTC’S, ENABLE THE SRS AND

VERIFY CORRECT OPERATION

DTC 83 - LEFT HAND SIDE AIR BAG CIRCUIT CAPACITANCE TOO HIGH

Figure 12M-132

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

At ignition on, and on a constant monitoring cycle of every 500 milliseconds during the ignition cycle, the SDM

performs a system self check.

If the SDM detects the capacitance in the left hand side air bag circuit is too high (greater than 550 nF) for longer

than 3 - 5 seconds, a current DTC 83 will set (refer 3.3 SRS SELF DIAGNOSTICS in this Section for more details).

DTC 83 will set if the in-built capacitor in the SRS wiring harness connector YB201 is faulty.

When DTC 83 sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS warning lamp and sets a current DTC 83. Should the fault

conditions detected by the SDM clear during the same ignition cycle, the current code will clear and become a

history DTC 83. The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

If a DTC 83 is set, the SRS warning lam p is illuminated on each ignition cycle, even if the DTC is set as a history

DTC, until the f ault conditions for setting DTC 83 ar e rectified and the DT C (c urrent or history) can then be cleared

from the SDM via TECH 2.

ACTION REQUIRED

If DTC 83 is set, the left hand side air bag m ay not operate and theref ore, the SRS side air bag and ‘pigtail’ wiring

harness assembly must be replaced. Refer to 2.3 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE ASSEMBLY in this Section for the

correct procedure on replacing the side air bag and ‘pigtail’ wiring harness connector.

NOTE:

Due to the design of the anti-back-out c onnec tor on the s ide air bag module as sembly, connector YB201 can not be

disconnected from the side air bag module assembly without damaging the assembly. Therefore, repairs to the SRS

‘pigtail’ wiring harness that run through the front seat are not to be attempted (this includes the capacitor in

connector YB201). If this ‘pigtail’ harness is damaged in any way, the harness and side air bag module assembly

must be replaced as an assembly.

After the SRS side air bag and ‘pigtail’ wiring harness assembly have been replaced, ensure all SRS components

are reconnected, clear DTCs , enable the SRS and verify the corr ect operation of the system ( i.e. warning lam p not

illuminated after five seconds of ignition being switched ON).

NOTE:

After replacement, the front seat should be put through its full adjustment (forward/backwards, full recline and up

and down) to ensure that the wiring harness does not foul with any of the seat components.

DTC 84 - LEFT HAND SIDE AIR BAG CIRCUIT CAPACITANCE TOO LOW

Figure 12M-133

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

At ignition on, and on a constant monitoring cycle of every 500 milliseconds during the ignition cycle, the SDM

performs a system self check.

If the SDM detects the capac itanc e in the lef t hand s ide air bag c irc uit is too low (less than 390 nF ) for longer than 3

- 5 seconds, a current DTC 84 will set (refer to 3.3 SRS SELF DIAGNOSTICS in this Section for more details).

DTC 84 will set if the in-built capacitor in the SRS wiring harness connector YB201 is faulty.

When DTC 84 sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS warning lamp and sets a current DTC 84. Should the fault

conditions detected by the SDM clear during the same ignition cycle, the current code will clear and become a

history DTC 84. The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

If a DTC 84 is set, the SRS warning lam p is illuminated on each ignition cycle, even if the DTC is set as a history

DTC, until the f ault conditions for setting DTC 84 ar e rectified and the DT C (c urrent or history) can then be cleared

from the SDM via TECH 2.

ACTION REQUIRED

If DTC 84 is set, the left hand side air bag m ay not operate and theref ore, the SRS side air bag and ‘pigtail’ wiring

harness assembly must be replaced. Refer to 2.3 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE ASSEMBLY in this Section for the

correct procedure on replacing the side air bag and ‘pigtail’ wiring harness connector.

NOTE:

Due to the design of the anti-back-out c onnec tor on the s ide air bag module as sembly, connector YB201 can not be

disconnected from the side air bag module assembly without damaging the assembly. Therefore, repairs to the SRS

‘pigtail’ wiring harness that run through the front seat are not to be attempted (this includes the capacitor in

connector YB201). If this ‘pigtail’ harness is damaged in any way, the harness and side air bag module assembly

must be replaced as an assembly.

After the SRS s ide air bag and ‘pigtail’ wiring harness assem b lies have been replac ed, ensur e all SRS c om ponents

are reconnected, clear DTCs , enable the SRS and verify the corr ect operation of the system ( i.e. warning lam p not

illuminated after five seconds of ignition being switched ON).

NOTE:

After replacement, the front seat should be put through its full adjustment (forward/backwards, full recline and up

and down) to ensure the wiring harness does not foul with any of the seat components.

DTC 85 - LEFT HAND SIDE AIR BAG CIRCUIT RESISTANCE TOO HIGH

Figure 12M-134

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

At ignition on, and on a constant monitoring cycle of every 500 milliseconds during the ignition cycle, the SDM

performs a system self check.

If the SDM detects a resist ance in the left hand side air bag c ircuit that is too high (greater than 8.4 ohm for longer

than 3 - 5 seconds, a current DTC 85 will set (refer to 3.3 SRS SELF DIAGNOSTICS in this Section for more

details).

DTC 85 will set if circuits 385 or 386 (including the side air bag inflator module) are open circuit.

When DTC 85 sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS warning lamp and sets a current DTC 85. Should the fault

conditions detected by the SDM clear during the same ignition cycle, the current code will clear and become a

history DTC 85. The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

If a DTC 85 is set, the SRS warning lam p is illuminated on each ignition cycle, even if the DTC is set as a history

DTC, until the f ault conditions for setting DTC 85 ar e rectified and the DT C (c urrent or history) can then be cleared

from the SDM via TECH 2.

If DTC 85 is set, dependent on where the fault is, the left hand side air bag may not operate.

TEST DESCRIPTION

The following number refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart:

1. Uses TECH 2 to check if DTC 85 is current or history.

2. Checks for intermittent fault by monitoring TECH 2 screen. If screen display changes during a wiring 'wiggle'

test, a fault with the wiring is at that location.

3. Tool AU485 is a dum my load tak ing the place of the side air bag inf lator m odule. If DTC 85 bec omes a history

DTC with dummy load connected, the system fault is in the side air bag inflator module assembly (or the

‘pigtail’ wiring harness that connects to the side air bag module).

4. Checks circuit 385 for open circuit.

5. Checks circuit 386 for open circuit.

NOTES ON DIAGNOSTIC CHART

1. For all wiring harness checking procedures, refer to Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS in this Service

Information CD.

2. Refer to 2.7 WIRING REPA IR in this Section before conducting any SRS wiring harness repairs.

3. Due to the design of the anti-back-out connector on the side air bag module assembly, connector YB201 can

not be disconnected from the side air bag module assembly without damaging the assembly. Therefore,

repairs to the SRS ‘pigtail’ wiring harness that run through the f ront seat are not to be attem pted. If this ‘pigtail’

harness is damaged in any way, the harness and side air bag module assembly must be replaced as an

assembly.

4. Wiring should be checked at point where TECH 2 screen display changed status. If necessary, split open

wiring harness.

Figure 12M-135

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. ∙Install TECH 2 to DLC.

∙Select Body / SRS /

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Read DTC

Information.

∙Is DTC 85 current?

Go to Step 3. Go to Step 2.

2. ∙With TECH 2 still

connected, select

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Clear DTC

Information and clear

all (if any) DTCs.

∙Select Diagnostic

Trouble Codes / Read

DTC Information and

monitor the TECH 2

screen display to see if

it changes status while

performing the

following:

Put left hand front seat

through it’s full

adjustment (forward /

backward, up / down

and full recline).

'Wiggle' SRS wiring

harness at all

accessible locations

between the SDM and

the side air bag wiring

harness connector

YB205.

∙Does TECH 2 screen

display change status

from No Diagnostic

Trouble Codes?

Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTES 2, 3 &

4 above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

Fault not present.

Check all system

wiring harness

connectors, and

terminals.

Clear DTC and

recheck system.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

3. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect SRS wiring

harness connector

YB205 (located next to

the left hand front

seat) from the left

hand side air bag

inflator module ‘pigtail’

harness.

∙Connect Tool No.

AU485 to SRS wiring

harness connector

YB205.

∙Reconnect battery.

∙Connect TECH 2 to

DLC and select Body /

SRS / Diagnostic

Trouble Codes / Read

DTC Information

∙Is DTC 85 still

current?

Go to Step 4. Replace left hand

side air bag

inflator module

and ‘pigtail’ wiring

harness

assembly, refer to

2.3 SIDE AIR

BAG MODULE

ASSEMBLY in

this Section

(refer NOTE 3

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

4. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect SDM

wiring harness

connector YB189 from

the SDM.

∙Using Tool KM-609-

20, check wiring

between SDM wiring

harness connector

YB189, terminal 16

and SRS wiring

harness connector

YB205, circuit 385

(Yellow/Green wire)

for open circuit (refer

to NOTE 1 above).

∙Is all OK?

Go to Step 5. Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

5. ∙With SDM wiring

harness connector

YB189 disconnected

from the SDM and

using Tool KM-609-20,

check wiring between

SDM wiring harness

connector YB189,

terminal 17 and SRS

wiring harness

connector YB205,

circuit 386 (Brown /

Green wire) for open

circuit (refer to

NOTE 1 above).

∙Is all OK?

Replace SDM,

refer to 2.7

SENSING AND

DIAGNOSTIC

MODULE in this

Section.

Recheck circuit to

verify repair.

Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

WHEN ALL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIRS A RE COMPLETED, ENSURE ALL SRS

COMPONENTS ARE RECONNECTED, CLEAR ALL DTC’S, ENABLE THE SRS AND

VERIFY CORRECT OPERATION

DTC 86 - LEFT HAND SIDE AIR BAG CIRCUIT RESISTANCE TOO LOW

Figure 12M-136

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

At ignition on, and on a constant monitoring cycle of every 500 milliseconds during the ignition cycle, the SDM

performs a system self check.

If the SDM detects a resistance in the lef t hand s ide air bag c irc uit that is too low (less than 0.6 ohm) f or longer than

3 - 5 seconds, a current DTC 86 will set (refer to 3.3 SRS SELF DIA GNOSTICS in this Section for more details).

DTC 86 will set if circuits 385 or 386, (including the side air bag inflator module assembly) are shorted together.

When DTC 86 sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS warning lamp and sets a current DTC 86. Should the fault

conditions detected by the SDM clear during the same ignition cycle, the current code will clear and become a

history DTC 86. The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

If a DTC 86 is set, the SRS warning lam p is illuminated on each ignition cycle, even if the DTC is set as a history

DTC, until the f ault conditions for setting DTC 86 ar e rectified and the DT C (c urrent or history) can then be cleared

from the SDM via TECH 2.

If DTC 86 is set, dependent on where the fault is, the left hand side air bag may not operate.

TEST DESCRIPTION

The following number refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart:

1. Uses TECH 2 to check if DTC 86 is current or history.

2. Checks for intermittent fault by monitoring TECH 2 screen. If screen display changes during a wiring 'wiggle'

test, a fault with the wiring is at that location.

3. Tool AU485 is a dum my load tak ing the place of the side air bag inf lator m odule. If DTC 85 bec omes a history

DTC with dummy load connected, the system fault is in the side air bag inflator module assembly (or the

‘pigtail’ wiring harness that connects to the side air bag module).

4. This test checks the wiring between the SDM wiring harness connector YB189 and SRS wiring harness

connector YB205 for a short circuit..

NOTES ON DIAGNOSTIC CHART

1. For all wiring harness checking procedures, refer to Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS in this Service

Information CD.

2. Refer to 2.7 WIRING REPA IR in this Section before conducting any SRS wiring harness repairs.

3. Due to the design of the anti-back-out connector on the side air bag module assembly, connector YB201 can

not be disconnected from the side air bag module assembly without damaging the assembly. Therefore,

repairs to the SRS ‘pigtail’ wiring harness that run through the f ront seat are not to be attem pted. If this ‘pigtail’

harness is damaged in any way, the harness and side air bag module assembly must be replaced as an

assembly.

4. Wiring should be checked at point where TECH 2 screen display changed status. If necessary, split open

wiring harness.

Figure 12M-137

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. ∙Install TECH 2 to DLC.

∙Select Body / SRS /

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Read DTC

Information.

∙Is DTC 86 current?

Go to Step 3. Go to Step 2.

2. ∙With TECH 2 still

connected, select

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Clear DTC

Information and clear

all (if any) DTCs.

∙Select Diagnostic

Trouble Codes / Read

DTC Information and

monitor the TECH 2

screen display to see if

it changes status while

performing the

following:

Put left hand front seat

through it’s full

adjustment (forward /

backward, up / down

and full recline).

'Wiggle' SRS wiring

harness at all

accessible locations

between the SDM and

the side air bag wiring

harness connector

YB205.

∙Does TECH 2 screen

display change status

from No Diagnostic

Trouble Codes?

Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTES 2, 3 &

4 above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

Fault not present.

Check all system

wiring harness

connectors, and

terminals.

Clear DTC and

recheck system.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

3. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect SRS wiring

harness connector

YB205 (located next to

the left hand front

seat) from the left

hand side air bag

inflator module ‘pigtail’

harness.

∙Connect Tool No.

AU485 to SRS wiring

harness connector

YB205.

∙Reconnect battery.

∙Connect TECH 2 to

DLC and select Body /

SRS / Diagnostic

Trouble Codes / Read

DTC Information

∙Is DTC 86 still

current?

Go to Step 4. Replace left hand

side air bag

inflator module

and ‘pigtail’ wiring

harness

assembly, refer to

2.3 SIDE AIR

BAG MODULE

ASSEMBLY in

this Section

(refer NOTE 3

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

4. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect SDM

wiring harness

connector YB189 from

the SDM.

∙Disconnect Tool No.

AU485 from SRS

wiring harness

connector YB205.

∙With SRS wiring

harness connector

YB205 disconnected,

and using Tool KM-

609-20, check for

continuity between

SDM wiring harness

connector YB189,

terminal 17, circuit 386

(Brown/Green wire)

and terminal 16, circuit

385 (Yellow/Green

wire) (refer to NOTES

1 and 3 above).

∙Does continuity exist?

Repair short in

circuits 386 and

385, between

SDM wiring

harness

connector YB189

and YB205 as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

Replace SDM,

refer to 2.4

SENSING AND

DIAGNOSTIC

MODULE (SDM)

in this Section.

Recheck circuit to

verify repair.

WHEN ALL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIRS A RE COMPLETED, ENSURE ALL SRS

COMPONENTS ARE RECONNECTED, CLEAR ALL DTC’S, ENABLE THE SRS AND

VERIFY CORRECT OPERATION

DTC 247 - LEFT HAND SIDE IMPACT AIR BAG CIRCUIT POWER STAGE ERROR

T12M130

SDM

YB189

YB201

LE FT HAND

SIDE AIRBAG

INFLATOR

LEFT HAND

SIDE AIRBAG INFLATOR (+)

LEFT HAND

SIDE AIRBAG INFLATOR (-)

YB205

Y/G (3 85)

BR/G (386)

Figure 12M-138

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

At ignition on, the SDM perfor ms an initial system self check of the SDM power stages . If during this initial self test

the SDM detects a fault with the Left Hand Side Impact Air Bag Circuit power stage a current DTC 247 Left Hand

Side Impact Air Bag Circuit Power Stage Error will set. On completion of the initial system self test the SDM then

performs a test of the Left Hand Side Impact Air Bag Circuit. If the SDM detects a problem with this circuit the

associated Lef t Hand Side Impact Air Bag Cir cuit DTC will be set and the DTC 247 Lef t Hand Side Impact Air Bag

Circuit Air Bag Circuit Power Stage Error will become a history DTC.

DTC 247 Left Hand Side Impact Air Bag Circuit Power Stage Error will set if a fault occurs in the Left Hand Side

Impact Air Bag, connector YB201 with the in-built capacitor, connector YB205, the SRS wiring harness, connector

YB189/190 or SDM.

When a history DTC 247 Left Hand Side Impact Air Bag Circuit Power Stage Error sets, the SDM illuminates the

SRS warning lam p. Should the f ault conditions detected by the SDM clear during the sam e ignition cycle the code

will remain a history DTC 247 Left Hand Side Impact Air Bag Circuit Power Stage Error for all ignition cycles until

cleared. The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

When a DTC 247 Left Hand Side Impact Air Bag Circuit Power Stage Error sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS

warning lamp for the remainder of the ignition cycle. Should the fault conditions detected by the SDM clear during

the sam e ignition cycle the code will rem ain a history DTC 247 Left Hand Side Im pact Air Bag Circuit Power Stage

Error for all ignition cycles until cleared. The SRS warning lamp will also remain illuminated until the history DTC

247 Left Hand Side Impact Air Bag Circuit Power Stage Error is cleared.

If a DTC 247 Left Hand Side Impac t Air Bag Circuit Power Stage is set, dependent on where the fault is , the Right

Hand Pre-Tensioner may not operate.

ACTION REQUIRED

If DT C 247 Lef t Hand Side Im pac t Air Bag Circuit Power Stage Error and any other DTC is set then the diagnos tics

for the other DTC should be carried out first. For example if a DTC 247 Left Hand Side Impact Air Bag Circuit Power

Stage Error and a DTC 85 Left Hand Side Impact Air Bag Circuit Resistance High are set, the diagnostics for a DTC

85 Left Hand Side Impact Air Bag Circuit Resistance High should be carried out first.

If only a DTC 247 Left Hand Side Impact Air Bag Circuit Power Stage Error is set then the SDM should be replaced.

NOTE: An intermittent in the Left Hand Side Im pact Air Bag Circuit may cause a DTC 247 Left Hand Side Impact

Air Bag Circuit Power Stage Error to set.

After the fault has been rectified, ensure that all SRS components are reconnected, clear DTCs, enable the SRS

and verify the correct operation of the system (i.e. warning lamp not illuminated after five seconds of ignition being

switched ON).

NOTE: After replacement, the front seat should be put through its full adjustment (forward/backwards, full recline

and up and down) to ensure the wiring harness does not foul with any of the seat components.

TEST DESCRIPTION

The following numbers refer to Step numbers in the following diagnostic chart.

1. Uses TECH 2 to check if a DTC 247 Left Hand Side Impact Air Bag Circuit Power Stage Error is history code,

and if any other Left Hand Side Impact Air Bag Circuit current or history DTCs are set. If any other DTCs are set

refer to these DTCs first.

2. Checks for intermittent fault by monitoring TECH 2 screen during ignition on cycle. If screen display changes

during a wiring 'wiggle' test, a fault with the wiring is at that location.

3. If no other DTCs are set and there are no intermittents in the Left Hand Side Impact Air Bag Circuit then the

SDM should be replaced.

NOTES ON DIAGNOSTIC CHART

1. For all wiring harness checking procedures, refer to VT Series 1 Service Information, WIRING DIAGRAMS,

SECTION 12P.

2. Refer to VT Series 1 Service Information Section 12M, SRS VERSION 6.2, 2.8 SRS WIRING REPAIR before

conducting any SRS wiring harness repairs.

T12M176

YB189

8.1 SDM WIRING HARNESS

CONNECTOR

BR/B (393)

50 25

BLU/B (351) R/B (352)

BR/W (353)

Y/R (354)

P/B (739)

B (305)

G/W (1220)

W (347)

G (348)

Y/B (349)

GY/B (350)

Y/G (385)

BR/G (386)

Y/W (387)

BR/W (388)

Y/BLU (392)

GY/W (407)

LBLU (408) Y/W (387) BR/W (388)

(RIGHT HAND SIDE AIR BAG)

BR/G (386) Y/G (385)

(LEFT HAND SIDE AIR BAG)

YB205

SIDE AIR BAG

CONNECTOR HARNESS

Figure 12M-139

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. • Install TECH 2 to DLC.

• Select Body / SRS / Diagnostic Trouble Codes /

Read DTC Information.

• Is a DTC 247 Left Hand Side Impact Air Bag Circuit

Power Stage Error a history DTC, and are any other

Left Hand Side Impact Air Bag Circuit DTCs set?

Go to other Left

Hand Side

Impact Air Bag

Circuit DTC

diagnostic chart

in this Section.

Go to Step 2.

2. • With TECH 2 still connected, select Diagnostic

Trouble Codes / Clear DTC Information and clear all

(if any) DTCs.

• Select Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC

Information and monitor the TECH 2 screen display

to see if it changes status while performing the

following:

Put left hand front seat through it’s full adjustment

(forward / backward, up / down and full recline).

'Wiggle' SRS wiring harness, at all accessible

locations between the SDM and the side impact air

bag wiring harness connector YB205.

• Does TECH 2 screen display change status from

No Diagnostic Trouble Codes?

Go to applicable

DTC chart in this

Section.

Go to step 3.

3 • Replace SDM, refer to VT Series 1 Service

Information Section 12M, SRS VERSION 8.0 & 8.1,

2.4 SENSING AND DIAGNOSTIC MODULE (SDM).

Recheck circuit to verify repair.

WHEN ALL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIRS ARE COMPLETED, ENSURE ALL SRS COMPONENTS ARE

RECONNECTED, CLEAR ALL DTC’S, ENABLE THE SRS AND VERIFY CORRECT OPERATION

DTC 97 - RIGHT HAND SIDE AIR BAG CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

Figure 12M-140

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

At ignition on, and on a constant monitoring cycle of every 500 milliseconds during the ignition cycle, the SDM

performs a system self check.

If the SDM detects a resistance to battery supply is less than 5 k ohms in either the positive and/or negative circuit

for m ore than 3 - 5 seconds, a current DTC 97 will set (refer to 3.3 SRS SELF DIAGNOSTICS in this Section for

more details).

DTC 97 will set if circuits 388 (side air bag positive side) and/or 387 (side air bag negative side) are shorted to

battery +.

When DTC 97 sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS warning lamp and sets a current DTC 97. Should the fault

conditions detected by the SDM clear during the same ignition cycle, the current code will clear and become a

history DTC 97. The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

If a DTC 97 is set, the SRS warning lam p is illuminated on each ignition cycle, even if the DTC is set as a history

DTC, until the f ault conditions for setting DTC 97 ar e rectified and the DT C (c urrent or history) can then be cleared

from the SDM via TECH 2.

If DTC 97 is set, the SRS, including the right hand side air bag, may still be operational.

TEST DESCRIPTION

The following number refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart:

1. Uses TECH 2 to check if DTC 97 is current or history.

2. Checks for intermittent fault by monitoring TECH 2 screen. If screen display changes during a wiring 'wiggle'

test, a fault with the wiring is at that location.

3. Tool AU485 is a dum my load taking the place of the right hand side air bag inf lator module assembly. If DTC

97 becomes a history DTC with dummy load connected, the system fault is in the side air bag inflator module

assembly (or the ‘pigtail’ wiring harness that connects to the side air bag module).

4. Checks circuit 388 and 387 for short to battery +.

NOTES ON DIAGNOSTIC CHART

1. For all wiring harness checking procedures, refer to Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS in this Service

Information CD.

2. Refer to 2.7 SRS WIRING REPAIR in this Section before conducting any SRS wiring harness repairs.

3. Due to the design of the anti-back-out connector on the side air bag module assembly, connector YB201 can

not be disconnected from the side air bag module assembly without damaging the assembly. Therefore,

repairs to the SRS ‘pigtail’ wiring harness that run through the f ront seat are not to be attem pted. If this ‘pigtail’

harness is damaged in any way, the harness and side air bag module assembly must be replaced as an

assembly.

Figure 12M-141

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. ∙Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

∙Select Body / SRS /

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Read DTC

Information.

∙Is DTC 97 current?

Go to Step 3. Go to Step 2.

2. ∙With TECH 2 still

connected, select

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Clear DTC

Information and clear

all (if any) DTCs.

∙Select Diagnostic

Trouble Codes / Read

DTC Information and

monitor the TECH 2

screen display to see if

it changes status while

performing the

following:

Put right hand front

seat through it’s full

adjustment (forward /

backward, up / down

and full recline).

'Wiggle' SRS wiring

harness at all

accessible locations

between the SDM and

the side air bag wiring

harness connector

YB205.

∙Does TECH 2 screen

display change status

from No Diagnostic

Trouble Codes?

Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2 & 3

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

Fault not present.

Check all system

wiring harness

connectors, and

terminals.

Clear DTC and

recheck system.

3. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect SRS wiring

harness connector

YB205 (located next to

the right hand front

seat) from the left

hand side air bag

inflator module ‘pigtail’

harness.

∙Connect Tool No.

AU485 to SRS wiring

harness connector

YB205.

∙Reconnect battery.

∙Connect TECH 2 to

DLC and select: Body

/ SRS / Diagnostic

Trouble Codes / Read

DTC Information.

∙Is DTC 97 still

current?

Go to Step 4. Replace right

hand side air bag

and ‘‘pigtail’’

wiring harness

assembly, refer to

2.3 SIDE AIR

BAG MODULE

ASSEMBLY in

this Section

(refer to NOTE 3

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

4. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect SDM

wiring harness

connector YB189 from

the SDM.

∙Reconnect battery.

∙Using Tool KM-609-

20, check wiring

between SDM wiring

harness connector

YB189, terminals 16

and 17 and SRS

connector YB205,

circuits 385

(Yellow/Green wire)

and 386 (Brown/Green

wire) for short to

battery + (refer to

NOTE 1 above).

∙Is all OK?

Replace SDM,

refer to 2.7

SENSING AND

DIAGNOSTIC

MODULE in this

Section.

Recheck circuit to

verify repair.

Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

WHEN ALL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIRS A RE COMPLETED, ENSURE ALL SRS

COMPONENTS ARE RECONNECTED, CLEAR ALL DTC’S, ENABLE THE SRS AND

VERIFY CORRECT OPERATION

DTC 98 - RIGHT HAND SIDE AIR BAG CIRCUIT SHORT TO EARTH

Figure 12M-142

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

At ignition on, and on a constant monitoring cycle of every 500 milliseconds during the ignition cycle, the SDM

performs a s ystem s elf c heck. If the SDM detec ts a r es istanc e to earth of less than 3 k ohms in either the pos itive or

negative inflator circuit for more than 3 - 5 seconds, a current DTC 98 will set (refer to

3.3 SRS SELF DIAGNOSTICS in this Section for more details).

DTC 98 will set if circuits 388 (side air bag positive side) and/or 387 (side air bag negative side) are shorted to

earth.

When DTC 98 sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS warning lamp and sets a current DTC 98. Should the fault

conditions detected by the SDM clear during the same ignition cycle, the current code will clear and become a

history DTC 98. The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

If a DTC 98 is set, the SRS warning lam p is illuminated on each ignition cycle, even if the DTC is set as a history

DTC, until the f ault conditions for setting DTC 98 ar e rectified and the DT C (c urrent or history) can then be cleared

from the SDM via TECH 2.

If DTC 98 is set, the SRS, including the right hand side air bag, may still be operational.

TEST DESCRIPTION

The following number refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart:

1. Uses TECH 2 to check if DTC 98 is current or history.

2. TECH 2 in this mode should display approximately 1.6 - 6.4 ohms if the passenger’s air bag loop circuit is OK.

3. If screen display changes during a wiring 'wiggle' test, a fault with the wiring is at that location.

4. Tool AU485 is a dummy load taking the place of the side air bag inflator module. If TECH 2 displays the correct

resistance of the dummy load, the system fault is in the side air bag inflator module assembly (or the ‘pigtail’

wiring harness that connects to the side air bag module).

6. This test c hecks the wiring between the SDM wiring harness connector YB189, term inal 18 and the right hand

side air bag inflator module connector YB205 for faults.

7. This test c hecks the wiring between the SDM wiring harness connector YB189, term inal 19 and the right hand

side air bag inflator module connector YB205 for faults.

NOTES ON DIAGNOSTIC CHART

1. For all wiring harness checking procedures, refer to Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS in this Service

Information CD.

2. Refer to 2.7 WIRING REPA IR in this Section before conducting any SRS wiring harness repairs.

3. Due to the design of the anti-back-out connector on the side air bag module assembly, connector YB201 can

not be disconnected from the side air bag module assembly without damaging the assembly. Therefore,

repairs to the SRS ‘pigtail’ wiring harness that run through the f ront seat are not to be attem pted. If this ‘pigtail’

harness is damaged in any way, the harness and side air bag module assembly must be replaced as an

assembly.

4. Wiring should be checked at point where TECH 2 screen display changed status. If necessary, split open

wiring harness.

Figure 12M-143

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. ∙Connect TECH 2 to DLC.

∙Select Body / SRS /

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Read DTC

Information.

∙Does TECH 2 display

DTC 98 as a Current

DTC?

Go to Step 2. Go to Step 3.

2. ∙With TECH 2 still

connected to DLC, select

Body / SRS / Data

Display and scroll to

RIGHT HAND SIDE AIR

BAG LOOP

RESISTANCE.

∙Is the resistance value

displayed on TECH 2 as

specified?

Approx.

1.6 - 6.4

Ohms

Go to Step 3. Go to Step 4.

3. ∙With TECH 2 still

connected, select

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Clear DTC

Information and clear all

(if any) DTCs.

∙Select Diagnostic

Trouble Codes / Read

DTC Information and

monitor the TECH 2

screen display to see if it

changes status while

performing the following:

Put right hand front seat

through it’s full

adjustment (forward /

backward, up / down and

full recline).

'Wiggle' SRS wiring

harness at all accessible

locations between the

SDM and the side air bag

wiring harness connector

YB205.

∙Does TECH 2 screen

display change status

from No Diagnostic

Trouble Codes?

Make repairs as

necessary (refer

NOTES 2, 3 & 4

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

Fault not present.

Check all system

wiring harness

connectors, and

terminals.

Clear DTC and

recheck system.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

4. ∙Disable the SRS, refer to

2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect SRS wiring

harness connector

YB205 (located next to

the right hand front seat)

from the right hand side

air bag inflator module

‘pigtail’ harness.

∙Connect Tool No. AU485

to SRS wiring harness

connector YB205.

∙Reconnect battery.

∙Connect TECH 2 to DLC

and select Body / SRS /

Data Display and scroll to

RIGHT HAND SIDE AIR

BAG LOOP

RESISTANCE'.

∙Is the resistance value

displayed on TECH 2 as

specified?

Approx.

2.0

Ohms

Replace right

hand side air bag

inflator module

and ‘pigtail’ wiring

harness

assembly, refer to

2.3 SIDE AIR

BAG MODULE

ASSEMBLY in

this Section

(refer NOTE 3

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

Go to Step 5.

5. ∙Disable the SRS, refer to

2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect SDM wiring

harness connector

YB189 from the SDM.

∙Remove Tool AU485

from YB205.

∙Using Tool KM-609-20,

check wiring between

SDM wiring harness

connector YB189,

terminal 18 and SRS

connector YB205, circuit

387 (Yellow/White wire)

for short to earth (refer

NOTE 1 above).

∙Is all OK?

Go to Step 6. Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

6. · With SDM wiring harness

connector YB189

disconnected from the

SDM and using Tool KM-

609-20, check wiring

between SDM wiring

harness connector

YB189, terminal 19 and

SRS connector YB205,

circuit 388 (Brown/ White

wire) for a short to earth

(refer to NOTE 1 above).

· Is all OK?

Replace SDM,

refer to 2.7

SENSING AND

DIAGNOSTIC

MODULE in this

Section.

Recheck circuit to

verify repair.

Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

WHEN ALL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIRS ARE COMPLETED, ENSURE ALL SRS

COMPONENTS ARE RECONNECTED, CLEAR ALL DTC’S, ENABLE THE SRS AND

VERIFY CORRECT OPERATION

DTC 99 - RIGHT HAND SIDE AIR BAG CIRCUIT CAPACITANCE TOO HIGH

Figure 12M-144

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

At ignition on, and on a constant monitoring cycle of every 500 milliseconds during the ignition cycle, the SDM

performs a system self check.

If the SDM detects the capacitanc e in the right hand side air bag circ uit is too high (greater than 550 nF) f or longer

than 3 - 5 seconds, a current DTC 99 will set (refer to 3.3 SRS SELF DIAGNOSTICS in this Section for more

details).

DTC 99 will set if the in-built capacitor in the SRS wiring harness connector YB201 is faulty.

When DTC 99 sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS warning lamp and sets a current DTC 99. Should the fault

conditions detected by the SDM clear during the same ignition cycle, the current code will clear and become a

history DTC 99. The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

If a DTC 99 is set, the SRS warning lam p is illuminated on each ignition cycle, even if the DTC is set as a history

DTC, until the f ault conditions for setting DTC 99 ar e rectified and the DT C (c urrent or history) can then be cleared

from the SDM via TECH 2.

ACTION REQUIRED

If DTC 99 is set, the right hand side air bag may not operate and therefore, the SRS side air bag and ‘pigtail’ wiring

harness assembly must be replaced. Refer to 2.3 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE ASSEMBLY in this Section for the

correct procedure on replacing the side air bag and ‘pigtail’ wiring harness connector.

NOTE:

Due to the design of the anti-back-out c onnec tor on the s ide air bag module as sembly, connector YB201 can not be

disconnected from the side air bag module assembly without damaging the assembly. Therefore, repairs to the SRS

‘pigtail’ wiring harness that run through the front seat are not to be attempted (this includes the capacitor in

connector YB201). If this ‘pigtail’ harness is damaged in any way, the harness and side air bag module assembly

must be replaced as an assembly.

After the SRS s ide air bag and ‘pigtail’ wiring harness assem b lies have been replac ed, ensur e all SRS c om ponents

are reconnected, clear DTCs , enable the SRS and verify the corr ect operation of the system ( i.e. warning lam p not

illuminated after five seconds of ignition being switched ON).

NOTE:

After replacement, the front seat should be put through its full adjustment (forward/backwards, full recline and up

and down) to ensure that the wiring harness does not foul with any of the seat components.

DTC 100 - RIGHT HAND SIDE AIR BAG CIRCUIT CAPACITANCE TOO LOW

Figure 12M-145

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

At ignition on, and on a constant monitoring cycle of every 500 milliseconds during the ignition cycle, the SDM

performs a system self check.

If the SDM detects the capacitance in the right hand side air bag c ircuit is too low (less than 390 nF) f or longer than

3 - 5 seconds, a current DTC 100 will set (refer to 3.3 SRS SELF DIA GNOSTICS in this Section for more details).

DTC 100 will set if the in-built capacitor in the SRS wiring harness connector YB201 is faulty.

When DTC 100 sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS warning lamp and sets a current DTC 100. Should the fault

conditions detected by the SDM clear during the same ignition cycle, the current code will clear and become a

history DTC 100. The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

If a DTC 100 is set, the SRS warning lamp is illum inated on each ignition cycle, even if the DTC is set as a history

DTC, until the f ault c onditions for setting DTC 100 are r ect if ied and the DT C ( cur r ent or his tory) can then be c leared

from the SDM via TECH 2.

ACTION REQUIRED

If DTC 100 is set, the right hand side air bag may not operate and therefore, the SRS side air bag and ‘pigtail’ wiring

harness assembly must be replaced. Refer to 2.3 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE ASSEMBLY in this Section for the

correct procedure on replacing the side air bag and ‘pigtail’ wiring harness connector.

NOTE:

Due to the design of the anti-back-out c onnec tor on the s ide air bag module as sembly, connector YB201 can not be

disconnected from the side air bag module assembly without damaging the assembly. Therefore, repairs to the SRS

‘pigtail’ wiring harness that run through the front seat are not to be attempted (this includes the capacitor in

connector YB201). If this ‘pigtail’ harness is damaged in any way, the harness and side air bag module assembly

must be replaced as an assembly.

After the SRS s ide air bag and ‘pigtail’ wiring harness assem b lies have been replac ed, ensur e all SRS c om ponents

are reconnected, clear DTCs , enable the SRS and verify the corr ect operation of the system ( i.e. warning lam p not

illuminated after five seconds of ignition being switched ON).

NOTE:

After replacement, the front seat should be put through its full adjustment (forward/backwards, full recline and up

and down) to ensure that the wiring harness does not foul with any of the seat components.

DTC 101 - RIGHT HAND SIDE AIR BAG CIRCUIT RESISTANCE TOO HIGH

Figure 12M-146

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

At ignition on, and on a constant monitoring cycle of every 500 milliseconds during the ignition cycle, the SDM

performs a system self check.

If the SDM detects a resist ance in the right hand side air bag circuit that is too high (gr eater than 8.4 ohm for longer

than 3 - 5 seconds, a current DTC 101 will set (refer to 3.3 SRS SELF DIAGNOSTICS in this Section for more

details).

DTC 101 will set if circuits 387 or 388 (including the side air bag inflator module) are open circuit.

When DTC 101 sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS warning lamp and sets a current DTC 101. Should the fault

conditions detected by the SDM clear during the same ignition cycle, the current code will clear and become a

history DTC 101. The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

If a DTC 101 is set, the SRS warning lamp is illum inated on each ignition cycle, even if the DTC is set as a history

DTC, until the f ault c onditions for setting DTC 101 are r ect if ied and the DT C ( cur r ent or his tory) can then be c leared

from the SDM via TECH 2.

If DTC 101 is set, dependent on where the fault is, the right hand side air bag may not operate.

TEST DESCRIPTION

The following number refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart:

1. Uses TECH 2 to check if DTC 101 is current or history.

2. Checks for intermittent fault by monitoring TECH 2 screen. If screen display changes during a wiring 'wiggle'

test, a fault with the wiring is at that location.

3. Tool AU485 is a dum my load taking the place of the side air bag inflator module. If DTC 101 becomes a hist ory

DTC with dummy load connected, the system fault is in the side air bag inflator module assembly (or the

‘pigtail’ wiring harness that connects to the side air bag module).

4. Checks circuit 388 for open circuit.

5. Checks circuit 387 for open circuit.

NOTES ON DIAGNOSTIC CHART

1. For all wiring harness checking procedures, refer to Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS in this Service

Information CD.

2. Refer to 2.7 WIRING REPA IR in this Section before conducting any SRS wiring harness repairs.

3. Due to the design of the anti-back-out connector on the side air bag module assembly, connector YB201 can

not be disconnected from the side air bag module assembly without damaging the assembly. Therefore,

repairs to the SRS ‘pigtail’ wiring harness that run through the f ront seat are not to be attem pted. If this ‘pigtail’

harness is damaged in any way, the harness and side air bag module assembly must be replaced as an

assembly.

4. Wiring should be checked at point where TECH 2 screen display changed status. If necessary, split open

wiring harness.

Figure 12M-147

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. ∙Install TECH 2 to DLC.

∙Select Body / SRS /

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Read DTC

Information.

∙Is DTC 101 current?

Go to Step 3. Go to Step 2.

2. ∙With TECH 2 still

connected, select

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Clear DTC

Information and clear

all (if any) DTCs.

∙Select Diagnostic

Trouble Codes / Read

DTC Information and

monitor the TECH 2

screen display to see if

it changes status while

performing the

following:

Put right hand front

seat through it’s full

adjustment (forward /

backward, up / down

and full recline).

'Wiggle' SRS wiring

harness at all

accessible locations

between the SDM and

the side air bag wiring

harness connector

YB205.

∙Does TECH 2 screen

display change status

from No Diagnostic

Trouble Codes?

Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTES 2, 3 &

4 above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

Fault not present.

Check all system

wiring harness

connectors, and

terminals.

Clear DTC and

recheck system.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

3. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect SRS wiring

harness connector

YB205 (located next to

the right hand front

seat) from the right

hand side air bag

inflator module ‘pigtail’

harness.

∙Connect Tool No.

AU485 to SRS wiring

harness connector

YB205.

∙Reconnect battery.

∙Connect TECH 2 to

DLC and select Body /

SRS / Diagnostic

Trouble Codes / Read

DTC Information

∙Is DTC 101 still

current?

Go to Step 4. Replace right

hand side air bag

inflator module

and ‘pigtail’ wiring

harness

assembly, refer to

2.3 SIDE AIR

BAG MODULE

ASSEMBLY in

this Section

(refer to NOTE 3

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

4. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect SDM

wiring harness

connector YB189 from

the SDM.

∙Using Tool KM-609-

20, check wiring

between SDM wiring

harness connector

YB189, terminal 19

and SRS wiring

harness connector

YB205, circuit 388

(Brown/White wire) for

open circuit (refer to

NOTE 1 above).

∙Is all OK?

Go to Step 5. Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

5. ∙With SDM wiring

harness connector

YB189 disconnected

from the SDM and

using Tool KM-609-20,

check wiring between

SDM wiring harness

connector YB189,

terminal 18 and SRS

wiring harness

connector YB205,

circuit 387 (Yellow/

White wire) for open

circuit (refer to

NOTE 1 above).

∙Is all OK?

Replace SDM,

refer to 2.7

SENSING AND

DIAGNOSTIC

MODULE in this

Section.

Recheck circuit to

verify repair.

Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

WHEN ALL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIRS A RE COMPLETED, ENSURE ALL SRS

COMPONENTS ARE RECONNECTED, CLEAR ALL DTC’S, ENABLE THE SRS AND

VERIFY CORRECT OPERATION

DTC 102 - RIGHT HAND SIDE AIR BAG CIRCUIT RESISTANCE TOO LOW

Figure 12M-148

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

At ignition on, and on a constant monitoring cycle of every 500 milliseconds during the ignition cycle, the SDM

performs a system self check.

If the SDM detects a resistance in the right hand side air bag circuit that is too low (less than 0.6 ohm) for longer

than 3 - 5 seconds, a current DTC 102 will set (refer to 3.3 SRS SELF DIAGNOSTICS in this Section for more

details).

DTC 102 will set if circuits 387 or 388, (including the side air bag inflator module assembly) are shorted together.

When DTC 102 sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS warning lamp and sets a current DTC 102. Should the fault

conditions detected by the SDM clear during the same ignition cycle, the current code will clear and become a

history DTC 102. The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

If a DTC 102 is set, the SRS warning lamp is illum inated on each ignition cycle, even if the DTC is set as a history

DTC, until the f ault c onditions for setting DTC 102 are r ect if ied and the DT C ( cur r ent or his tory) can then be c leared

from the SDM via TECH 2.

If DTC 102 is set, dependent on where the fault is, the right hand side air bag may not operate.

TEST DESCRIPTION

The following number refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart:

1. Uses TECH 2 to check if DTC 102 is current or history.

2. Checks for intermittent fault by monitoring TECH 2 screen. If screen display changes during a wiring 'wiggle'

test, a fault with the wiring is at that location.

3. Tool AU485 is a dum my load taking the place of the side air bag inflator module. If DTC 102 becomes a hist ory

DTC with dummy load connected, the system fault is in the side air bag inflator module assembly (or the

‘pigtail’ wiring harness that connects to the side air bag module).

4. This test checks the wiring between the SDM wiring harness connector YB189 and SRS wiring harness

connector YB205 for a short circuit.

NOTES ON DIAGNOSTIC CHART

1. For all wiring harness checking procedures, refer to Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS in this Service

Information CD.

2. Refer to 2.7 WIRING REPA IR in this Section before conducting any SRS wiring harness repairs.

3. Due to the design of the anti-back-out connector on the side air bag module assembly, connector YB201 can

not be disconnected from the side air bag module assembly without damaging the assembly. Therefore,

repairs to the SRS ‘pigtail’ wiring harness that run through the f ront seat are not to be attem pted. If this ‘pigtail’

harness is damaged in any way, the harness and side air bag module assembly must be replaced as an

assembly.

4. Wiring should be checked at point where TECH 2 screen display changed status. If necessary, split open

wiring harness.

Figure 12M-149

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. ∙Install TECH 2 to DLC.

∙Select Body / SRS /

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Read DTC

Information.

∙Is DTC 102 current?

Go to Step 3. Go to Step 2.

2. ∙With TECH 2 still

connected, select

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Clear DTC

Information and clear

all (if any) DTCs.

∙Select Diagnostic

Trouble Codes / Read

DTC Information and

monitor the TECH 2

screen display to see if

it changes status while

performing the

following:

Put right hand front

seat through it’s full

adjustment (forward /

backward, up / down

and full recline).

'Wiggle' SRS wiring

harness at all

accessible locations

between the SDM and

the side air bag wiring

harness connector

YB205.

∙Does TECH 2 screen

display change status

from No Diagnostic

Trouble Codes?

Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTES 2, 3 &

4 above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

Fault not present.

Check all system

wiring harness

connectors, and

terminals.

Clear DTC and

recheck system.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

3. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect SRS wiring

harness connector

YB205 (located next to

the right hand front

seat) from the right

hand side air bag

inflator module ‘pigtail’

harness.

∙Connect Tool No.

AU485 to SRS wiring

harness connector

YB205.

∙Reconnect battery.

∙Connect TECH 2 to

DLC and select Body /

SRS / Diagnostic

Trouble Codes / Read

DTC Information

∙Is DTC 102 still

current?

Go to Step 4. Replace right

hand side air bag

inflator module

and ‘pigtail’ wiring

harness

assembly, refer to

2.3 SIDE AIR

BAG MODULE

ASSEMBLY in

this Section

(refer to NOTE 3

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

4. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect SDM

wiring harness

connector YB189 from

the SDM.

∙Disconnect Tool No.

AU485 from SRS

wiring harness

connector YB205.

∙With SRS wiring

harness connector

YB205 disconnected,

and using Tool KM-

609-20, check for

continuity between

SDM wiring harness

connector YB189,

terminal 18, circuit 387

(Yellow/White wire)

and terminal 19, circuit

388 (Brown/White

wire)(refer to NOTES

1 and 3 above).

∙Does continuity exist?

Repair short in

circuits 387 and

388, between

SDM wiring

harness

connector YB189

and YB205 as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

Replace SDM,

refer to 2.4

SENSING AND

DIAGNOSTIC

MODULE (SDM)

in this Section.

Recheck circuit to

verify repair.

WHEN ALL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIRS A RE COMPLETED, ENSURE ALL SRS

COMPONENTS ARE RECONNECTED, CLEAR ALL DTC’S, ENABLE THE SRS AND

VERIFY CORRECT OPERATION

DTC 247 - RIGHT HAND SIDE IMPACT AIR BAG CIRCUIT POWER STAGE ERROR

T12M131

SDM

YB189

YB201

RIGHT HAND

SIDE AIRBAG

INFLATOR

RIGHT HAND

SIDE AIRBAG INFLATOR (+)

RIGHT HAND

SIDE AIRBAG INFLATOR (-)

YB205

BR/W (388)

Y/W (387)

Figure 12M-150

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

At ignition on, the SDM perfor ms an initial system self check of the SDM power stages . If during this initial self test

the SDM detects a f ault with the Right Hand Side Im pact Air Bag Circ uit power stage a current DTC 247 Right Hand

Side Impact Air Bag Circuit Power Stage Error will set. On completion of the initial system self test the SDM then

performs a test of the Right Hand Side Impact Air Bag Circuit. If the SDM detects a problem with this circuit the

associated Right Hand Side Impact Air Bag Circuit DTC will be set and the DTC 247 Right Hand Side Impact Air

Bag Circuit Air Bag Circuit Power Stage Error will become a history DTC.

DTC 247 Right Hand Side Im pact Air Bag Cir cuit Power Stage Error will set if a fault occ urs in the Right Hand Side

Impact Air Bag, connector YB201 with the in-built capacitor, connector YB205, the SRS wiring harness, connector

YB189/YB190 or SDM.

W hen a history DTC 247 Right Hand Side Impact Air Bag Circuit Power Stage Error sets, the SDM illuminates the

SRS warning lam p. Should the f ault conditions detected by the SDM clear during the sam e ignition cycle the code

will remain a his tory DTC 247 Right Hand Side Im pact Air Bag Circ uit Power Stage Err or for all ignition cycles until

cleared. The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

When a DTC 247 Right Hand Side Impact Air Bag Circuit Power Stage Error sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS

warning lamp for the remainder of the ignition cycle. Should the fault conditions detected by the SDM clear during

the same ignition c ycle the code will remain a his tor y DTC 247 Right Hand Side Im pac t Air Bag Circ uit Power Stage

Error for all ignition cycles until cleared. The SRS warning lamp will also remain illuminated until the history DTC

247 Right Hand Side Impact Air Bag Circuit Power Stage Error is cleared.

If a DT C 247 Right Hand Side Im pact Air Bag Cir cuit Power Stage is s et, dependent on where the f ault is, the Right

Hand Pre-Tensioner may not operate.

ACTION REQUIRED

If DTC 247 Right Hand Side Impact Air Bag Circuit Power Stage Error and any other DTC is set then the

diagnostics for the other DTC should be c ar ried out f irs t. For ex ample if a DT C 247 Right Hand Side Impac t Air Bag

Circuit Power Stage Error and a DTC 101 Right Hand Side Impact Air Bag Circuit Resistance High are set, the

diagnostics for a DTC 101 Right Hand Side Impact Air Bag Circuit Resistance High should be carried out first.

If only a DTC 247 Right Hand Side Impact Air Bag Circuit Power Stage Error is set then the SDM should be

replaced.

NOTE: An intermittent in the Right Hand Side Im pac t Air Bag Circuit m ay cause a DTC 247 Right Hand Side Impac t

Air Bag Circuit Power Stage Error to set.

After the fault has been rectified, ensure that all SRS components are reconnected, clear DTCs, enable the SRS

and verify the correct operation of the system (i.e. warning lamp not illuminated after five seconds of ignition being

switched ON).

NOTE: After replacement, the front seat should be put through its full adjustment (forward/backwards, full recline

and up and down) to ensure the wiring harness does not foul with any of the seat components.

TEST DESCRIPTION

The following numbers refer to Step numbers in the following diagnostic chart.

1. Uses TECH 2 to check if a DT C 247 Right Hand Side Im pact Air Bag Circ uit Power Stage Error is history code,

and if any other Right Hand Side Impact Air Bag Cir cuit current or histor y DT Cs are set. If any other DTCs ar e

set refer to these DTCs first.

2. Checks for intermittent fault by monitoring TECH 2 screen during ignition on cycle. If screen display changes

during a wiring 'wiggle' test, a fault with the wiring is at that location.

3. If no other DT Cs are set and there are no interm ittents in the Right Hand Side Impact Air Bag Circuit then the

SDM should be replaced.

NOTES ON DIAGNOSTIC CHART

1. For all wiring harness checking procedures, refer to VT Series 1 Service Information, WIRING DIAGRAMS,

SECTION 12P.

2. Refer to VT Series 1 Service Information Section 12M, SRS VERSION 6.2, 2.8 SRS WIRING REPAIR before

conducting any SRS wiring harness repairs.

T12M176

YB189

8.1 SD M WIRING HA RNESS

CONNECTOR

BR/B (393)

50 25

BLU/B (351) R/B (3 52)

BR/W ( 353 )

Y/R (354)

P/B (739)

B (30 5)

G/W (1220)

W (347)

G (348)

Y/B (349)

GY/B (350)

Y/G (385 )

BR/G (386)

Y/W (387)

BR/W ( 388 )

Y/BLU (392)

GY/W (407)

LBLU (408) Y/W (387) BR/W (388)

(RIGHT HAND SIDE AI R BAG)

BR/G (386) Y/G (385)

(LEFT HAND SIDE AIR BAG)

YB205

SIDE AIR BAG

CONNEC TOR HARNESS

Figure 12M-151

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. • Install TECH 2 to DLC.

• Select Body / SRS / Diagnostic Trouble Codes /

Read DTC Information.

• Is a DTC 247 Right Hand Side Impact Air Bag

Circuit Power Stage Error a history DTC, and are

any other Right Hand Side Impact Air Bag Circuit

DTCs set?

Go to other Right

Hand Side

Impact Air Bag

Circuit DTC

diagnostic chart

in this Section.

Go to Step 2.

2. • With TECH 2 still connected, select Diagnostic

Trouble Codes / Clear DTC Information and clear all

(if any) DTCs.

• Select Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC

Information and monitor the TECH 2 screen display

to see if it changes status while performing the

following:

• Put right hand front seat through it’s full adjustment

(forward / backward, up / down and full recline).

• 'Wiggle' SRS wiring harness, at all accessible

locations between the SDM and the side impact air

bag wiring harness connector YB205.

• Does TECH 2 screen display change status from

No Diagnostic Trouble Codes?

Go to applicable

DTC chart in this

Section.

Go to step 3.

3 • Replace SDM, refer to VT Series 1 Service

Information Section 12M, SRS VERSION 8.0 & 8.1,

2.4 SENSING AND DIAGNOSTIC MODULE (SDM).

Recheck circuit to verify repair.

WHEN ALL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIRS ARE COMPLETED, ENSURE ALL SRS COMPONENTS ARE

RECONNECTED, CLEAR ALL DTC’S, ENABLE THE SRS AND VERIFY CORRECT OPERATION

DTC 129 - LEFT PERIPHERAL ACCELERATION SENSOR LINE FAULT

Figure 12M-152

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

The peripher al acceleration sensor comm unicates continuously with the SDM by m odulating the consum ed current

at a constant voltage.

If this communication is interrupted or disturbed by a short circuit to earth, between the SDM and the left hand

peripheral acceleration sensor, for longer than 3 - 5 seconds, a current DTC 129 is set (refer to 3.3 SRS SELF

DIAGNOSTICS in this Section for more details).

DTC 129 will set if circuit 392 is shorted to earth.

When DTC 129 sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS warning lamp and sets a current DTC 129. Should the fault

conditions detected by the SDM clear during the same ignition cycle, the current code will clear and become a

history DTC 129. The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

If a DTC 129 is set, the SRS warning lamp is illum inated on each ignition cycle, even if the DTC is set as a history

DTC, until the f ault c onditions for setting DTC 129 are r ect if ied and the DT C ( cur r ent or his tory) can then be c leared

from the SDM via TECH 2.

If DTC 129 is set the left hand side air bag may not operate.

TEST DESCRIPTION

The following number refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart:

1. Uses TECH 2 to check if DTC 129 is current or history.

2. Checks for intermittent fault by monitoring TECH 2 screen. If screen display changes during a wiring 'wiggle'

test, a fault with the wiring is at that location.

3. Checks circuit 392 for short to earth.

4. By swapping the left hand peripheral acceleration sensor with a known good one (right hand side peripheral

acceleration sensor), determines whether the peripheral acceleration sensor or the SDM is causing the

problem.

NOTES ON DIAGNOSTIC CHART

1. For all wiring harness checking procedures, refer to Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS in this Service

Information CD.

2. Refer to 2.8 SRS WIRING REPAIR in Section 12M SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM - (VERSION

6.2) before conducting any SRS wiring harness repairs.

3. Do not loosen or unscrew the two nuts retaining the peripheral acceleration sensor to the mounting bracket.

The peripher al ac c eleration s ens or mus t only be removed f r om the B pillar with the mounting brac ket attac hed,

refer to 2.5 PERIPHERAL ACCELERATION SENSOR in this Section for the correct removal procedure.

Figure 12M-153

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. ∙Install TECH 2 to DLC.

∙Select Body / SRS /

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Read DTC

Information.

∙Is DTC 129 current?

Go to Step 3. Go to Step 2.

2. ∙With TECH 2 still

connected, select

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Clear DTC

Information and clear

all (if any) DTCs.

∙Select Diagnostic

Trouble Codes / Read

DTC Information,

'wiggle' SRS wiring

harness at all locations

between the SDM and

the left hand

peripheral acceleration

sensor wiring harness

connector YB196,

while monitoring

TECH 2 screen

display.

∙Does TECH 2 screen

display change status

from No Diagnostic

Trouble Codes?

Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

Fault not present.

Check all system

wiring harness

connectors, and

terminals.

Clear DTC and

recheck system.

3. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect SRS wiring

harness connector

YB196 from the left

hand peripheral

acceleration sensor.

∙Disconnect SDM

wiring harness

connector YB189 from

the SDM.

∙Using Tool KM-609-

20, check wiring

between SDM wiring

harness connector

YB189, terminal 20

and SRS wiring

harness connector

YB196, circuit 392

(Yellow/Blue wire) for

a short to earth (refer

to NOTE 1 above).

∙Is all OK?

Go to Step 4. Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

4. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Reconnect SRS wiring

harness connector

YB189 to the SDM.

∙Disconnect the left

hand peripheral

acceleration sensor

from connector YB196

and install a known

good peripheral

acceleration sensor

into connector YB196

(right peripheral

acceleration sensor

and bracket

assembly). Refer to

NOTE 3 above.

∙Reconnect battery.

∙Install TECH 2 to DLC

∙Select Body / SRS /

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Read DTC

Information.

∙Is DTC 129 current?

Replace SDM,

refer to 2.7

SENSING AND

DIAGNOSTIC

MODULE in this

Section.

Recheck circuit to

verify repair.

Replace left hand

peripheral

acceleration

sensor and

bracket assembly

(refer to 2.5

PERIPHERAL

ACCELERATION

SENSOR in this

Section).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

WHEN ALL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIRS A RE COMPLETED, ENSURE ALL SRS

COMPONENTS ARE RECONNECTED, CLEAR ALL DTC’S, ENABLE THE SRS AND

VERIFY CORRECT OPERATION

DTC 130 - RIGHT PERIPHERAL ACCELERATION SENSOR LINE FAULT

Figure 12M-154

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

The peripher al acceleration sensor comm unicates continuously with the SDM by m odulating the consum ed current

at a constant voltage.

If this communication is interrupted or disturbed by a short circuit to earth, between the SDM and the right hand

peripheral acceleration sensor, for longer than 3 - 5 seconds, a current DTC 130 is set (refer to

3.3 SRS SELF DIAGNOSTICS in this Section for more details).

DTC 130 will set if circuit 407 is shorted to earth.

When DTC 130 sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS warning lamp and sets a current DTC 130. Should the fault

conditions detected by the SDM clear during the same ignition cycle, the current code will clear and become a

history DTC 130. The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

If a DTC 130 is set, the SRS warning lamp is illum inated on each ignition cycle, even if the DTC is set as a history

DTC, until the f ault c onditions for setting DTC 130 are r ect if ied and the DT C ( cur r ent or his tory) can then be c leared

from the SDM via TECH 2.

If DTC 130 is set the right hand side air bag may not operate.

TEST DESCRIPTION

The following number refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart:

1. Uses TECH 2 to check if DTC 130 is current or history.

2. Checks for intermittent fault by monitoring TECH 2 screen. If screen display changes during a wiring 'wiggle'

test, a fault with the wiring is at that location.

3. Checks circuit 407 for short to earth.

4. By swapping the right hand peripheral acceleration sensor with a known good one (left hand side peripheral

acceleration sensor), determines whether the peripheral acceleration sensor or the SDM is causing the

problem.

NOTES ON DIAGNOSTIC CHART

1. For all wiring harness checking procedures, refer to Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS in this Service

Information CD.

2. Refer to 2.8 SRS WIRING REPAIR in Section 12M SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM - (VERSION

6.2) before conducting any SRS wiring harness repairs.

3. Do not loosen or unscrew the two nuts retaining the peripheral acceleration sensor to the mounting bracket.

The peripher al ac c eleration s ens or mus t only be removed f r om the B pillar with the mounting brac ket attac hed,

refer to 2.5 PERIPHERAL ACCELERATION SENSOR in this Section for the correct removal procedure.

Figure 12M-155

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. ∙Install TECH 2 to DLC.

∙Select Body / SRS /

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Read DTC

Information.

∙Is DTC 130 current?

Go to Step 3. Go to Step 2.

2. ∙With TECH 2 still

connected, select

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Clear DTC

Information and clear

all (if any) DTCs.

∙Select Diagnostic

Trouble Codes / Read

DTC Information,

'wiggle' SRS wiring

harness at all locations

between the SDM and

the right hand

peripheral acceleration

sensor wiring harness

connector YB196,

while monitoring

TECH 2 screen

display.

∙Does TECH 2 screen

display change status

from No Diagnostic

Trouble Codes?

Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

Fault not present.

Check all system

wiring harness

connectors, and

terminals.

Clear DTC and

recheck system.

3. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect SRS wiring

harness connector

YB196 from the right

hand peripheral

acceleration sensor.

∙Disconnect SDM

wiring harness

connector YB189 from

the SDM.

∙Using Tool KM-609-

20, check wiring

between SDM wiring

harness connector

YB189, terminal 21

and SRS wiring

harness connector

YB196, circuit 407

(Grey/White wire) for a

short to earth (refer to

NOTE 1 above).

∙Is all OK?

Go to Step 4. Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

4. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Reconnect SRS wiring

harness connector

YB189 to the SDM.

∙Disconnect the right

hand peripheral

acceleration sensor

from connector YB196

and connect a known

good peripheral

acceleration sensor

into connector YB196

(left peripheral

acceleration sensor

and bracket

assembly). Refer to

NOTE 3 above.

∙Reconnect battery.

∙Install TECH 2 to DLC

∙Select Body / SRS /

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Read DTC

Information.

∙Is DTC 129 current?

Replace SDM,

refer to 2.4

SENSING AND

DIAGNOSTIC

MODULE in this

Section.

Recheck circuit to

verify repair.

Replace right

hand peripheral

acceleration

sensor and

bracket assembly

(refer to 2.5

PERIPHERAL

ACCELERATION

SENSOR in this

Section).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

WHEN ALL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIRS A RE COMPLETED, ENSURE ALL SRS

COMPONENTS ARE RECONNECTED, CLEAR ALL DTC’S, ENABLE THE SRS AND

VERIFY CORRECT OPERATION

DTC 131 - LEFT PERIPHERAL ACCELERATION SENSOR COMMUNICATION FAULT

Figure 12M-156

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

The peripher al acceleration sensor comm unicates continuously with the SDM by m odulating the consum ed current

at a constant voltage.

If this communication is interrupted between the SDM and the left hand peripheral acceleration sensor for longer

than 3 - 5 seconds, a current DTC 131 is set (refer to 3.3 SRS SELF DIAGNOSTICS in this Section for more

details).

DTC 131 will set if circuits 392 or 393 (including the peripheral acceleration sensor) are open circuit.

When DTC 131 sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS warning lamp and sets a current DTC 131. Should the fault

conditions detected by the SDM clear during the same ignition cycle, the current code will clear and become a

history DTC 131. The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

If a DTC 131 is set, the SRS warning lamp is illum inated on each ignition cycle, even if the DTC is set as a history

DTC, until the f ault c onditions for setting DTC 131 are r ect if ied and the DT C ( cur r ent or his tory) can then be c leared

from the SDM via TECH 2.

If DTC 131 is set, the left hand side air bag may not operate.

TEST DESCRIPTION

The following number refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart:

1. Uses TECH 2 to check if DTC 131 is current or history.

2. Checks for intermittent fault by monitoring TECH 2 screen. If screen display changes during a wiring 'wiggle'

test, a fault with the wiring is at that location.

3. Checks circuit 392 for an open circuit.

4. Checks circuit 393 for an open circuit.

5. By swapping the left hand peripheral acceleration sensor with a known good one (right hand side peripheral

acceleration sensor?), determines whether the peripheral acceleration sensor or the SDM is causing the

problem.

NOTES ON DIAGNOSTIC CHART

1. For all wiring harness checking procedures, refer to Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS in this Service

Information CD.

2. Refer to 2.8 SRS WIRING REPAIR in Section 12M SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM - (VERSION

6.2) before conducting any SRS wiring harness repairs.

3. Do not loosen or unscrew the two nuts retaining the peripheral acceleration sensor to the mounting bracket.

The peripher al ac c eleration s ens or mus t only be removed f r om the B pillar with the mounting brac ket attac hed,

refer to 2.5 PERIPHERAL ACCELERATION SENSOR in this Section for the correct removal procedure.

Figure 12M-157

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. ∙Install TECH 2 to DLC.

∙Select Body / SRS /

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Read DTC

Information.

∙Is DTC 131 current?

Go to Step 3. Go to Step 2.

2. ∙With TECH 2 still

connected, select

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Clear DTC

Information and clear

all (if any) DTCs.

∙Select Diagnostic

Trouble Codes / Read

DTC Information,

'wiggle' SRS wiring

harness at all locations

between the SDM and

the left hand

peripheral acceleration

sensor wiring harness

connector YB196,

while monitoring

TECH 2 screen

display.

∙Does TECH 2 screen

display change status

from No Diagnostic

Trouble Codes?

Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

Fault not present.

Check all system

wiring harness

connectors, and

terminals.

Clear DTC and

recheck system.

3. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect SRS wiring

harness connector

YB196 from the left

hand peripheral

acceleration sensor.

∙Disconnect SDM

wiring harness

connector YB189 from

the SDM.

∙Using Tool KM-609-

20, check wiring

between SDM wiring

harness connector

YB189, terminal 20

and SRS wiring

harness connector

YB196, circuit 392

(Yellow/Blue wire) for

an open circuit (refer

to NOTE 1 above).

∙Is all OK?

Go to Step 4. Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

4. ∙With the SRS disabled

and connectors YB189

and YB196

disconnected, use

Tool KM-609-20 to

check wiring between

SDM wiring harness

connector YB189,

terminal 33 and SRS

wiring harness

connector YB196,

circuit 393

(Brown/Black wire) for

an open circuit (refer

to NOTE 1 above).

∙Is all OK?

Go to Step 5. Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

5. ∙With the SRS disabled

reconnect SRS wiring

harness connector

YB189 to the SDM.

∙Disconnect the left

hand peripheral

acceleration sensor

from connector YB196

and connect a known

good peripheral

acceleration sensor

into connector YB196

(right peripheral

acceleration sensor

and bracket

assembly). Refer to

NOTE 3 above.

∙Reconnect battery.

∙Install TECH 2 to DLC

∙Select Body / SRS /

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Read DTC

Information.

∙Is DTC 131 current?

Replace SDM,

refer to 2.4

SENSING AND

DIAGNOSTIC

MODULE in this

Section.

Recheck circuit to

verify repair.

Replace left hand

peripheral

acceleration

sensor and

bracket assembly

(refer to 2.5

PERIPHERAL

ACCELERATION

SENSOR in this

Section).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

WHEN ALL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIRS A RE COMPLETED, ENSURE ALL SRS

COMPONENTS ARE RECONNECTED, CLEAR ALL DTC’S, ENABLE THE SRS AND

VERIFY CORRECT OPERATION

DTC 132 - RIGHT PERIPHERAL ACCELERATION SENSOR COMMUNICATION FAULT

Figure 12M-158

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

The peripher al acceleration sensor comm unicates continuously with the SDM by m odulating the consum ed current

at a constant voltage.

If this c omm unication is inter rupted between the SDM and the right hand peripheral acceler ation for longer than 3 -

5 seconds, a current DTC 132 is set (refer to 3.3 SRS SELF DIAGNOSTICS in this Section for more details).

DTC 132 will set if circuits 407 or 408 (including the peripheral acceleration sensor) are open circuit.

When DTC 132 sets, the SDM illuminates the SRS warning lamp and sets a current DTC 132. Should the fault

conditions detected by the SDM clear during the same ignition cycle, the current code will clear and become a

history DTC 132. The SRS warning lamp will remain on for the remainder of the ignition cycle.

If a DTC 132 is set, the SRS warning lamp is illum inated on each ignition cycle, even if the DTC is set as a history

DTC, until the f ault c onditions for setting DTC 132 are r ect if ied and the DT C ( cur r ent or his tory) can then be c leared

from the SDM via TECH 2.

If DTC 132 is set, the right hand side air bag may not operate.

TEST DESCRIPTION

The following number refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart:

1. Uses TECH 2 to check if DTC 132 is current or history.

2. Checks for intermittent fault by monitoring TECH 2 screen. If screen display changes during a wiring 'wiggle'

test, a fault with the wiring is at that location.

3. Checks circuit 407 for an open circuit.

4. Checks circuit 408 for an open circuit.

5. By swapping the right hand peripheral acceleration sensor with a known good one (left hand side peripheral

acceleration sensor), determines whether the peripheral acceleration sensor or the SDM is causing the

problem.

NOTES ON DIAGNOSTIC CHART

1. For all wiring harness checking procedures, refer to Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS in this Service

Information CD.

2. Refer to 2.8 SRS WIRING REPAIR in Section 12M SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM - (VERSION

6.2) before conducting any SRS wiring harness repairs.

3. Do not loosen or unscrew the two nuts retaining the peripheral acceleration sensor to the mounting bracket.

The peripher al ac c eleration s ens or mus t only be removed f r om the B pillar with the mounting brac ket attac hed,

refer to 2.5 PERIPHERAL ACCELERATION SENSOR in this Section for the correct removal procedure.

Figure 12M-159

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. ∙Install TECH 2 to DLC.

∙Select Body / SRS /

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Read DTC

Information.

∙Is DTC 132 current?

Go to Step 3. Go to Step 2.

2. ∙With TECH 2 still

connected, select

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Clear DTC

Information and clear

all (if any) DTCs.

∙Select Diagnostic

Trouble Codes / Read

DTC Information,

'wiggle' SRS wiring

harness at all locations

between the SDM and

the right hand

peripheral acceleration

sensor wiring harness

connector YB196,

while monitoring

TECH 2 screen

display.

∙Does TECH 2 screen

display change status

from No Diagnostic

Trouble Codes?

Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

Fault not present.

Check all system

wiring harness

connectors, and

terminals.

Clear DTC and

recheck system.

3. ∙Disable the SRS, refer

to 2.2 SYSTEM

DISABLING AND

ENABLING

PROCEDURE in this

Section.

∙Disconnect SRS wiring

harness connector

YB196 from the right

hand peripheral

acceleration sensor.

∙Disconnect SDM

wiring harness

connector YB189 from

the SDM.

∙Using Tool KM-609-

20, check wiring

between SDM wiring

harness connector

YB189, terminal 21

and SRS wiring

harness connector

YB196, circuit 407

(Grey/White wire) for

an open circuit (refer

to NOTE 1 above).

∙Is all OK?

Go to Step 4. Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

4. ∙With the SRS disabled

and connectors YB189

and YB196

disconnected, use

Tool KM-609-20 to

check wiring between

SDM wiring harness

connector YB189,

terminal 34 and SRS

wiring harness

connector YB196,

circuit 408 (Light Blue

wire) for an open

circuit (refer to

NOTE 1 above).

∙Is all OK?

Go to Step 5. Make repairs as

necessary (refer

to NOTE 2

above).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

5. ∙With the SRS disabled

reconnect SRS wiring

harness connector

YB189 to the SDM.

• Disconnect the right

hand peripheral

acceleration sensor

from connector YB196

and connect a known

good peripheral

acceleration sensor

into connector YB196

(left peripheral

acceleration sensor

and bracket

assembly). Refer to

NOTE 3 above.

∙Reconnect battery.

∙Install TECH 2 to DLC.

∙Select Body / SRS /

Diagnostic Trouble

Codes / Read DTC

Information.

∙Is DTC 132 current?

Replace SDM,

refer to 2.7

SENSING AND

DIAGNOSTIC

MODULE in this

Section.

Recheck circuit to

verify repair.

Replace right

hand peripheral

acceleration

sensor and

bracket assembly

(refer to 2.5

PERIPHERAL

ACCELERATION

SENSOR in this

Section).

Clear DTC and

recheck system to

verify repair.

WHEN ALL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIRS A RE COMPLETED, ENSURE ALL SRS

COMPONENTS ARE RECONNECTED, CLEAR ALL DTC’S, ENABLE THE SRS AND

VERIFY CORRECT OPERATION

DTC 133 - LEFT PERIPHERAL ACCELERATION SENSOR IDENTIFICATION FAULT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

Peripheral acceleration sensors are programmed during manufacture for a particular vehicle / application type.

During this proc ess, the per ipheral acc eleration sens or is given a unique identif ication code which c orres ponds with

the SDM. If this c ode does not corres pond with the SDM, a current DTC 133 will be set and the SRS warning lam p

will be illuminated with the ignition on.

ACTION REQUIRED

If DTC 133 is set, the left hand side air bag may not operate and therefore, the left hand side peripheral acceleration

sensor and bracket assembly must be replaced with the correct peripheral acceleration sensor for that particular

vehicle.

Always refer to the latest Holden spare par ts inform ation (Part Finder) for the correct part num ber of the peripheral

acceleration sensor and bracket assem bly for that particular vehicle. To replace the peripheral acceleration sensor

and bracket assembly, refer to 2.5 PERIPHERAL ACCELERATION SENSOR (SIDE AIR BAG SENSOR) in this

Section.

After the peripheral acceleration sensor and bracket assembly have been replaced, ensure that all SRS

components are reconnected, clear DTCs, enable the SRS and verify the correct operation of the system (i.e.

warning lamp not illuminated after five seconds of ignition being switched ON).

DTC 134 - RIGHT PERIPHERAL ACCELERATION SENSOR IDENTIFICATION FAULT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

Peripheral acceleration sensors are programmed during manufacture for a particular vehicle / application type.

During this proc ess, the per ipheral acc eleration sens or is given a unique identif ication code which c orres ponds with

the SDM. If this c ode does not corres pond with the SDM, a current DTC 134 will be set and the SRS warning lam p

will be illuminated with the ignition on.

ACTION REQUIRED

If DTC 134 is set, the right hand side air bag may not operate and therefore, the right hand side peripheral

acceleration sens or and brack et assem bly mus t be replaced with the correc t peripheral acceler ation sensor f or that

particular vehicle.

Always refer to the latest Holden spare par ts inform ation (Part Finder) for the correct part num ber of the peripheral

acceleration sensor and bracket assem bly for that particular vehicle. To replace the peripheral acceleration sensor

and bracket assembly, refer to 2.5 PERIPHERAL ACCELERATION SENSOR (SIDE AIR BAG SENSOR) in this

Section.

After the peripheral acceleration sensor and bracket assembly have been replaced, ensure that all SRS

components are reconnected, clear DTCs, enable the SRS and verify the correct operation of the system (i.e.

warning lamp not illuminated after five seconds of ignition being switched ON).

DTC 135 - LEFT PERIPHERAL ACCELERATION SENSOR HARDWARE FAULT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

At ignition on, and on a constant monitoring cycle of every 500 milliseconds during the ignition cycle, the SDM

performs a system self check. If the SMD detects an internal fault in the left hand side peripheral acceleration

sensor, a DTC 135 will be set and the SRS warning lamp will be illuminated continuously with the ignition on.

ACTION REQUIRED

If DTC 135 is set, the left hand side air bag may not operate and therefore, the left hand side peripheral acceleration

sensor and bracket assembly must be replaced. Refer to 2.5 PERIPHERAL ACCELERATION SENSOR (SIDE

AIR BAG SENSOR) in this Section for the correct replacement procedure.

After the peripheral acceleration sensor and bracket assembly have been replaced, ensure that all SRS

components are reconnected, clear DTCs, enable the SRS and verify the correct operation of the system (i.e.

warning lamp not illuminated after five seconds of ignition being switched ON).

DTC 136 - RIGHT PERIPHERAL ACCELERATION SENSOR HARDWARE FAULT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

At ignition on, and on a constant monitoring cycle of every 500 milliseconds during the ignition cycle, the SDM

performs a system self check. If the SMD detects an internal fault in the right hand side peripheral acceleration

sensor, a DTC 136 will be set and the SRS warning lamp will be illuminated continuously with the ignition on.

ACTION REQUIRED

If DTC 136 is set, the right hand side air bag may not operate and therefore, the right hand side peripheral

acceleration sensor and bracket assembly must be replaced. Refer to 2.5 PERIPHERAL ACCELERATION

SENSOR (SIDE AIR BAG SENSOR) in this Section for the correct replacement procedure.

After the peripheral acceleration sensor and bracket assembly have been replaced, ensure that all SRS

components are reconnected, clear DTCs, enable the SRS and verify the correct operation of the system (i.e.

warning lamp not illuminated after five seconds of ignition being switched ON).

DTC 161 - CONFIGURATION MISMATCH: TOO LITTLE OR TOO MANY LOOPS IN SRS

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

NOTE 1:

DTC 161 will only be set and displayed by TECH 2 as a history DTC even if it is current.

NOTE 2:

The instruments must be programmed for the correct vehicle configuration, refer to

Section 12C INSTRUMENTS, WIPERS/WASHERS AND HORN in this Service Information CD for the procedure

on programming the instruments.

The SDM will set a history DTC 161 because it has been internally configured for a two, three, four or six loop

system but at the same time has detected a mismatch with the actual vehicle configuration.

To identify the different SDMs, refer to the identification label on the top of the SDM. The last digit of the part

number identifies the number of loops the SDM is designed for: 2, 3, 4 or 6.

2 Loop System Seat Belt Pre-tensioners only

3 Loop System Seat Belt Pre-tensioners and Driver’s Air Bag Only

4 Loop System Seat Belt Pre-tensioners, Driver’s and Front Passenger’s

Air Bag Only

6 Loop System Seat Belt Pre-tensioners, Driver’s, Front Passenger’s

and Side Air Bags

NOTE:

Always refer to the latest VT spare parts microfiche / Part Finder information for the latest part numbers when

ordering SRS components.

TECH 2 is capable of displaying the SDM part number; connect TECH 2 to DLC, select Diagnosis / Body / SRS /

Turn Ignition ON and the system identification screen will display the SDM part number.

As an aid to the technician to diagnose the source of the mismatch, always check f or other DTC set in the system

first. Faults setting other DTCs should be rectified first, all DTCs cleared from the SDM and system retested to

determine if DTC 161 will set again. If DTC sets again, install the correct SDM.

DTC 163 - SDM INTERNAL FAULT

Figure 12M-160

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

NOTE:

DTC 163 will only be set and displayed by TECH 2 as a history DTC even if it is current.

At ignition on, and on a constant monitoring cycle of every 500 milliseconds during the ignition cycle, the SDM

perfor ms a s ystem self check . If the SMD detects a f ault in itself, a DT C 163 will be set and the SRS warning lam p

will be illuminated continuously with the ignition on.

ACTION REQUIRED

If DTC 163 is set, the SRS may not operate and therefore, the SDM must be replaced.

4. TORQUE WRENCH SPECIFI CATIONS

Front Passenger's Air Bag Inflator Module Assembly to

Dash Panel Attaching Nut 15 - 25

Front Seat to Floor Securing Bolt 30 - 50

Horn Bar and Air Bag Inflator Module Assembly

to Steering Wheel Securing Screws 10 - 14

Peripheral Acceleration Sensor and Bracket Assembly

Retaining Bolt (Front Seat Belt Retractor Bolt) 35 - 50

Seat Belt Buckle and Pre-tensioner Assembly Retaining Bolt 45

Sensing and Diagnostic Module to Floor Attaching Screw 7 - 11

Steering wheel retaining bolt 40 - 50

Side Air Bag Assembly to Front Seat Back Frame

Retaining Nut 5 - 6

5. SPECIAL TOOLS

TOOL NO. REF IN TEXT TOOL DESCRIPTION COMMENTS

ETX30H T30H TORX BIT USE IN CONJUNCTION WITH

J25359-8, (OR ETX55HLD)

TOR X BIT HOLDER

USED FOR REMOVING SDM

TO FLOOR ATTACHING

SCREWS AND HORN BAR AND

AIR BAG INFLATOR MODULE

ASSEMBLY TO STEERING

WHEEL SECURING SCREWS

J25359-8 TORX BIT HOLDER PREVIOUSLY RELEASED FOR

V CAR

KM-609-20 SRS TEST LEAD SET PREVIOUSLY RELEASED

E1992 DEPLOYMENT HARNESS ADAPTOR PREVIOUSLY RELEASED

USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH

DEPLOYMENT HARNESS

J38826-1 FOR DEPLOYING

SRS COMPONENTS WHEN

REMOVED FROM THE

VEHICLE

J38826-1 DEPLOYMENT HARNESS PREVIOUSLY RELEASED

USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH

DEPLOYMENT HARNESS

ADAPTOR E1992 FOR

DEPLOYING SRS

COMPONENTS WHEN

REMOVED FROM THE

VEHICLE

SD28280B DUMMY LOAD FOR SEAT BELT PRE-

TENSIONERS, AND DRIVER’S

AND FRONT PASSENGER’S

AIR BAGS

TOOL NO. REF IN TEXT TOOL DESCRIPTION COMMENTS

AU485 DUMMY LOAD FOR SIDE AIR BAG

J38125-A TERMINAL REPAIR KIT PREVIOUSLY RELEASED.

MUST BE USED WHEN

REPAIRING SRS WIRING,

REFER TO 2.8, SRS WIRING

REPAIR IN SECTION 12M

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

SYSTEM - (VERSION 6.2)

OF THIS SERVICE

INFORMATION CD.

TECH 2 DIAGNOSTIC SCAN TOOL PREVIOUSLY RELEASED

J39200 DIGITAL MULTIMETER TOOL NO. J39200

PREVIOUSLY RELEASED, OR

USE COMMERCIALLY

AVAILABLE EQUIVALENT.

MUST HAVE 10 MOHM INPUT

IMPEDANCE AND BE CAPABLE

OF READING CAPACITANCE

KM-609 ELECTRONIC KIT USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH

A MULTIMETER FOR

MEASURING VOLTAGES AND

RESISTANCE’S WITHOUT

DAMAGING WIRING HARNESS

CONNECTORS

SECTION 12P - WIRING DIAGRAMS ( FOR VERSION 8.0/8.1)

1. GENERAL INFORMATION

This section contains two Supplem ental Restraint System (SRS) electric al circuit wiring diagram s, together with the

corresponding wiring harness layout illustrations for VT Series Models with 8.0 and 8.1 Sensing and Diagnostic

Modules (SDM):

The first wiring diagram is for VT Series Models with an 8.0 SDM fitted; this includes 2, 3, and 4 loop SRS (pre-

tensioners only, pre-tensioners and driver’s air bag only, and pre-tensioners, driver’s and front passenger’s air bag).

The s econd wiring diagram is f or VT Ser ies Models with an 8.1 SDM f itted; this is f or vehicles with 6 loop SRS ( pre -

tensioners, driver’s, front passenger’s and left and right side air bags).

Thes e diagrams s hould be referred to when diagnosing SRS electr ical problems and should always be the starting

point for electrical trouble shooting.

The wiring diagrams illustrate how a particular circuit should work by design, and should be understood before trying

to determine why it does not work.

NOTE:

It is important to realise that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they

appear in the vehicle geographically. However, for broad indications of relays, switches or consumers, refer to

Section 12N FUSES, RELAYS & WIRING HARNESSES in the VT Series Service Information CD.

For example, a meter length of wire is treated no differently in a wiring diagram from one which is only a few

centimetres long. Similarly, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible in schematic format

and in an activated state, with basic function being shown.

NOTE:

The wiring diagram on page 12P-3 may also be used for vehicles with a 6.2 SDM fitted, provided the vehicle was

built after August 1 1998.

Refer to Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS for the latest wiring diagram s and harness connector diagr ams f or the

Supplemental Restraint System:

Diagram No. 22A Supplemental Restraint System -

All models With 6.2 / 8.0 SDM’s

Wiring Harness Connectors

All models With 6.2 / 8.0 SDM’s

22B Supplemental Restraint System -

All models With 8.1 SDM’s (Side Air Bags)

Wiring Harness Connectors

All models With 8.1 SDM’s (Side Air Bags)